Port lib32 arangement from Debian.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
794e51c0 4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012
8a308ae8 5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
ac145307 25@set C6X
49fa1e15 26@set H8300
0285c67d 27@set HPPA
0285c67d 28@set I960
0285c67d 29@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 30@set M68K
3c3bdf30 31@set MMIX
2469cfa2 32@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
33@set POWERPC
34@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
35@set Renesas
36@set SPU
37@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 38@set WIN32
e0001a05 39@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
40@end ifset
41@c man end
42
9160ea82
AM
43@ifnottex
44@dircategory Software development
45@direntry
252b5132 46* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
47@end direntry
48@end ifnottex
252b5132 49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
9fbcbd81 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9fbcbd81
NC
95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
961999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
97Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 98
0285c67d 99Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 100under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
101or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 104section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 105@c man end
252b5132 106
252b5132
RH
107@end titlepage
108@end iftex
4ecceb71 109@contents
252b5132
RH
110@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
84ec0e6d 112@ifnottex
252b5132 113@node Top
71ba23f6 114@top LD
e49e529d
JM
115This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118@end ifset
119version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 120
cf055d54 121This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
122Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 124
252b5132
RH
125@menu
126* Overview:: Overview
127* Invocation:: Invocation
128* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129@ifset GENERIC
130* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131@end ifset
132@ifclear GENERIC
133@ifset H8300
134* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
136@ifset Renesas
137* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
138@end ifset
139@ifset I960
140* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
141@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
142@ifset ARM
143* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
144@end ifset
145@ifset HPPA
146* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
148@ifset M68HC11
149* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
150@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
151@ifset M68K
152* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
153@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
154@ifset POWERPC
155* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156@end ifset
157@ifset POWERPC64
158* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
160@ifset SPU
161* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
162@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
163@ifset TICOFF
164* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
165@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
166@ifset WIN32
167* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
168@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
169@ifset XTENSA
170* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
171@end ifset
252b5132
RH
172@end ifclear
173@ifclear SingleFormat
174* BFD:: BFD
175@end ifclear
176@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
177
178* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
179* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 180* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 181* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 182@end menu
84ec0e6d 183@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
184
185@node Overview
186@chapter Overview
187
188@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
189@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 190
0879a67a 191@ifset man
0285c67d 192@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 193ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
194@c man end
195
196@c man begin SEEALSO
197ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
198the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
199@file{ld}.
200@c man end
201@end ifset
202
203@c man begin DESCRIPTION
204
ff5dcc92 205@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 206their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 207compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 208
ff5dcc92 209@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
210a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
211to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
212
0285c67d
NC
213@ifset man
214@c For the man only
ece2d90e 215This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
216@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
217language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
218@end ifset
219
252b5132 220@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
221This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
222to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
223write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
224@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
225available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
226@end ifclear
227
228Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
229linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
230execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 231@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
232(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
233
0285c67d
NC
234@c man end
235
252b5132
RH
236@node Invocation
237@chapter Invocation
238
0285c67d
NC
239@c man begin DESCRIPTION
240
ff5dcc92 241The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
242and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
243you have many choices to control its behavior.
244
0285c67d
NC
245@c man end
246
252b5132
RH
247@ifset UsesEnvVars
248@menu
249* Options:: Command Line Options
250* Environment:: Environment Variables
251@end menu
252
253@node Options
254@section Command Line Options
255@end ifset
256
257@cindex command line
258@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
259
260@c man begin OPTIONS
261
252b5132
RH
262The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
263practice few of them are used in any particular context.
264@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 265For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
266object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
267link a file @code{hello.o}:
268
269@smallexample
270ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
271@end smallexample
272
ff5dcc92 273This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
274result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
275the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
276directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
277
ff5dcc92 278Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
279point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
280as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
281which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
282files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
283different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
284occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
285option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
286noted in the descriptions below.
287
288@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
289Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
290together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
291options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
292an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
293
294Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
295specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
296and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
297are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
298message @samp{No input files}.
299
36f63dca 300If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
301assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
302augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
303linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
304permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
305or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
306@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
307script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
308extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
309to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
310the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
311
312For options whose names are a single letter,
313option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
314whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
315option that requires them.
316
317For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 318precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 319@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 320this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 321only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
322@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
323name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
324output.
325
326Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
327option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
328immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
329@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
330Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
331accepted.
252b5132 332
36f63dca
NC
333Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
334(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
335prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
336compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
337
338@smallexample
2509a395 339 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
340@end smallexample
341
342This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
343silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
344may also arise when passing options that require values through a
345driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
346a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
347and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
348the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
349
350@smallexample
351 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
352@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
353
354Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
355linker:
356
ff5dcc92 357@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 358@include at-file.texi
dff70155 359
2509a395
SL
360@kindex -a @var{keyword}
361@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
362This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
363argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
364@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
365@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
366to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
367
7ee314fa
AM
368@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
371@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
372specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
373will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
374finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
375it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
376This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
377interface.
378
252b5132
RH
379@ifset I960
380@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
381@kindex -A @var{arch}
382@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
383@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
384@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
385In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
386Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
387@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
388the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 389archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
390family}, for details.
391
ff5dcc92 392Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
393other architecture families.
394@end ifset
395
396@ifclear SingleFormat
397@cindex binary input format
398@kindex -b @var{format}
399@kindex --format=@var{format}
400@cindex input format
401@cindex input format
402@item -b @var{input-format}
403@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
404@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
405file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 406@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 407that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 408configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 409to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
410default input format the most usual format on each machine.
411@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
412supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
413formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
414@xref{BFD}.
415
416You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
417binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
418linking object files of different formats), by including
419@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 420particular format.
252b5132
RH
421
422The default format is taken from the environment variable
423@code{GNUTARGET}.
424@ifset UsesEnvVars
425@xref{Environment}.
426@end ifset
427You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
428@code{TARGET};
429@ifclear man
430see @ref{Format Commands}.
431@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
432@end ifclear
433
434@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@cindex compatibility, MRI
437@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
438@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 439For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 440files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
441@ifclear man
442@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
443@end ifclear
444@ifset man
445the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
446@end ifset
447Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 448the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
449scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
450If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
451specified by any @samp{-L} options.
452
453@cindex common allocation
454@kindex -d
455@kindex -dc
456@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 457@item -d
252b5132
RH
458@itemx -dc
459@itemx -dp
460These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
461compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
462even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
463script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
464@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
465
7ee314fa
AM
466@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
467@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
468@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
469@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
470Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
471@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
472specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
473will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
474option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
475The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
476
252b5132
RH
477@cindex entry point, from command line
478@kindex -e @var{entry}
479@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 480@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
481@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
482Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
483program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
484named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
485and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
486base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
487@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
488and other ways of specifying the entry point.
489
b58f81ae
DJ
490@kindex --exclude-libs
491@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
492Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 493exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
494@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
495automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
496port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
497explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
498option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
499be treated as hidden.
500
e1c37eb5
DK
501@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
502@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
503Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
504should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
505into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
506may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
507used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
508the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
509match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
510command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
511of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
512regardless of this option.
513
252b5132
RH
514@cindex dynamic symbol table
515@kindex -E
516@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 517@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
518@item -E
519@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
520@itemx --no-export-dynamic
521When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
522option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
523all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
524set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
525
526If you do not use either of these options (or use the
527@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
528dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
529referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
530
531If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
532back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
533dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
534linking the program itself.
535
55255dae 536You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 537be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 538See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 539
8b747e1a
DK
540Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
541support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
542the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
543
36f63dca 544@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
545@cindex big-endian objects
546@cindex endianness
547@kindex -EB
548@item -EB
549Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
550
551@cindex little-endian objects
552@kindex -EL
553@item -EL
554Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 555@end ifclear
252b5132 556
2509a395
SL
557@kindex -f @var{name}
558@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
559@item -f @var{name}
560@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
561When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
562to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
563table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
564symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
565
566If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
567run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
568the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
569first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
570@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
571in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
572Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
573implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
574machine specific performance.
575
576This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
577will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
578
2509a395
SL
579@kindex -F @var{name}
580@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 581@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 582@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
583When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
584the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
585of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
586on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
587
588If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
589run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
590dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
591filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
592found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
593used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
594@var{name}.
595
ff5dcc92 596Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 597toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
598object files.
599@ifclear SingleFormat
600The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 601@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 602@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
603environment variable.
604@end ifclear
605The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
606creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 607
3dbf70a2 608@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
609@kindex -fini=@var{name}
610@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
611When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
612executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
613address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
614the function to call.
615
252b5132
RH
616@kindex -g
617@item -g
618Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
619
2509a395
SL
620@kindex -G @var{value}
621@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 622@cindex object size
2509a395 623@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
624@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
625Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
626@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
627MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
628sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
629
630@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 631@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 632@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 633@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
634@itemx -soname=@var{name}
635When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
636the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
637which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
638linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
639field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
640
641@kindex -i
642@cindex incremental link
643@item -i
644Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
645
3dbf70a2 646@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
647@kindex -init=@var{name}
648@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
649When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
650executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
651of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
652function to call.
653
252b5132 654@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 655@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 656@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 657@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
658@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
659Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
660list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
661If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 662will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 663will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 664
ff5dcc92 665On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
666files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
667and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
668called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
669@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
670indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
671to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
672@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
673
674The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
675specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
676was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
677command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
678archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
679the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
680
ff5dcc92 681See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
682archives multiple times.
683
684You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
685
686@ifset GENERIC
687This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 688if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
689behaviour of the AIX linker.
690@end ifset
691
692@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 693@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 694@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 695@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 696@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
697Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
698for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
699option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
700in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
701on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 702@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
703order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
704how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
705option is specified.
252b5132 706
9c8ebd6a
DJ
707If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
708by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
709
252b5132
RH
710@ifset UsesEnvVars
711The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 712@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
713some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
714@end ifset
715
716The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
717@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
718at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
719
720@cindex emulation
721@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 722@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
723Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
724emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
725
726If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
727@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
728
729Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
730configured.
731
732@cindex link map
733@kindex -M
734@kindex --print-map
735@item -M
736@itemx --print-map
737Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
738information about the link, including the following:
739
740@itemize @bullet
741@item
3b83e13a 742Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
743@item
744How common symbols are allocated.
745@item
746All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
747which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
748@item
749The values assigned to symbols.
750
751Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
752involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
753have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
754linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
755of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
756the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
757linker script containing:
758
759@smallexample
760 foo = 1
761 foo = foo * 4
762 foo = foo + 8
763@end smallexample
764
765will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
766option is used:
767
768@smallexample
769 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
772@end smallexample
773
774See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
775scripts.
252b5132
RH
776@end itemize
777
778@kindex -n
779@cindex read-only text
780@cindex NMAGIC
781@kindex --nmagic
782@item -n
783@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
784Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
785libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
786mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
787
788@kindex -N
789@kindex --omagic
790@cindex read/write from cmd line
791@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 792@item -N
252b5132
RH
793@itemx --omagic
794Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
795not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
796libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
797mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
798is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
799specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
800
801@kindex --no-omagic
802@cindex OMAGIC
803@item --no-omagic
804This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
805sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
806be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
807shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
808
809@kindex -o @var{output}
810@kindex --output=@var{output}
811@cindex naming the output file
812@item -o @var{output}
813@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 814Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
815option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
816script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
817
818@kindex -O @var{level}
819@cindex generating optimized output
820@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 821If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 822the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
823should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
824option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
825the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
826no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
827of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 828
a712da20
NC
829@kindex -q
830@kindex --emit-relocs
831@cindex retain relocations in final executable
832@item -q
833@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 834Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
835Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
836order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
837in larger executables.
838
dbab7a7b
NC
839This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
840
4f471f39
RS
841@kindex --force-dynamic
842@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
843@item --force-dynamic
844Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
845to VxWorks targets.
846
252b5132
RH
847@cindex partial link
848@cindex relocatable output
849@kindex -r
1049f94e 850@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 851@item -r
1049f94e 852@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 853Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 854turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
855linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
856magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
857@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 858@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
859If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
860linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
861constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
862
62bf86b4
HPN
863When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
864partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
865relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
866example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
867with input files in other formats at all.
868
252b5132
RH
869This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
870
871@kindex -R @var{file}
872@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
873@cindex symbol-only input
874@item -R @var{filename}
875@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
876Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
877relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
878to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
879programs. You may use this option more than once.
880
ff5dcc92 881For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 882followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 883the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
884
885@kindex -s
886@kindex --strip-all
887@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 888@item -s
252b5132
RH
889@itemx --strip-all
890Omit all symbol information from the output file.
891
892@kindex -S
893@kindex --strip-debug
894@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 895@item -S
252b5132
RH
896@itemx --strip-debug
897Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
898
899@kindex -t
900@kindex --trace
901@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 902@item -t
252b5132 903@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 904Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
905
906@kindex -T @var{script}
907@kindex --script=@var{script}
908@cindex script files
909@item -T @var{scriptfile}
910@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
911Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 912@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 913@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
914output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
915the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
916specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
917options accumulate.
252b5132 918
14be8564
L
919@kindex -dT @var{script}
920@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
921@cindex script files
922@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
923@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
924Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
925
926This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
927processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
928command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
929@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
930behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
931command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
932the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
933@samp{gcc}).
934
252b5132
RH
935@kindex -u @var{symbol}
936@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
937@cindex undefined symbol
938@item -u @var{symbol}
939@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
940Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
941symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
942modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
943different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
944option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
945
946@kindex -Ur
947@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 948@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
949For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
950@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 951turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
952@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
953It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
954with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
955be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
956@samp{-r} for the others.
957
577a0623
AM
958@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
961@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
962missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
963specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
964multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
965input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
966in a linker script.
a854a4a7 967
252b5132
RH
968@kindex -v
969@kindex -V
970@kindex --version
971@cindex version
972@item -v
973@itemx --version
974@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 975Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
976lists the supported emulations.
977
978@kindex -x
979@kindex --discard-all
980@cindex deleting local symbols
981@item -x
982@itemx --discard-all
983Delete all local symbols.
984
985@kindex -X
986@kindex --discard-locals
987@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 988@item -X
252b5132 989@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
990Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
991system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
992or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
993
994@kindex -y @var{symbol}
995@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
996@cindex symbol tracing
997@item -y @var{symbol}
998@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
999Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1000option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1001to prepend an underscore.
1002
1003This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1004don't know where the reference is coming from.
1005
1006@kindex -Y @var{path}
1007@item -Y @var{path}
1008Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1009for Solaris compatibility.
1010
1011@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1012@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1013The recognized keywords are:
1014@table @samp
1015
1016@item combreloc
1017Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1018lookup caching possible.
1019
1020@item defs
560e09e9 1021Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1022shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1023
6aa29e7b
JJ
1024@item execstack
1025Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1026
cd6d6c15
NC
1027@item initfirst
1028This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1029It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1030before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1031the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1032the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1033objects.
1034
1035@item interpose
1036Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1037but the primary executable.
1038
5fa222e4
AM
1039@item lazy
1040When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1041dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1042the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1043Lazy binding is the default.
1044
cd6d6c15
NC
1045@item loadfltr
1046Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1047runtime.
1048
1049@item muldefs
1050Allows multiple definitions.
1051
1052@item nocombreloc
1053Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1054
1055@item nocopyreloc
1056Disables production of copy relocs.
1057
1058@item nodefaultlib
1059Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1060ignore any default library search paths.
1061
1062@item nodelete
1063Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1064
1065@item nodlopen
1066Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1067
1068@item nodump
1069Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1070
6aa29e7b
JJ
1071@item noexecstack
1072Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1073
1074@item norelro
1075Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1076
cd6d6c15
NC
1077@item now
1078When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1079dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1080when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1081deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1082first called.
1083
1084@item origin
1085Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1086
6aa29e7b
JJ
1087@item relro
1088Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1089
24718e3b
L
1090@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1091Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1092
1093@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1094Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1095
04c3a755
NS
1096@item stack-size=@var{value}
1097Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1098Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1099@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1100
cd6d6c15
NC
1101@end table
1102
ece2d90e 1103Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1104
1105@kindex -(
1106@cindex groups of archives
1107@item -( @var{archives} -)
1108@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1109The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1110either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1111
1112The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1113references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1114the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1115archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1116object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1117would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1118they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1119resolved.
1120
1121Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1122it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1123more archives.
1124
69da35b5
NC
1125@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1126@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1127@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1128@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1129Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1130recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1131and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1132the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1133behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1134so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1135restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1136
4a43e768
AM
1137@kindex --as-needed
1138@kindex --no-as-needed
1139@item --as-needed
1140@itemx --no-as-needed
1141This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1142on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1143the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1144on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1145needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1146emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1147from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1148DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1149undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1150@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1151
e56f61be
L
1152@kindex --add-needed
1153@kindex --no-add-needed
1154@item --add-needed
1155@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1156These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1157their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1158options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1159and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1160
252b5132
RH
1161@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1162@item -assert @var{keyword}
1163This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1164
1165@kindex -Bdynamic
1166@kindex -dy
1167@kindex -call_shared
1168@item -Bdynamic
1169@itemx -dy
1170@itemx -call_shared
1171Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1172for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1173default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1174for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1175multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1176@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1177
a1ab1d2a
UD
1178@kindex -Bgroup
1179@item -Bgroup
1180Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1181section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1182object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1183@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1184only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1185
252b5132
RH
1186@kindex -Bstatic
1187@kindex -dn
1188@kindex -non_shared
1189@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1190@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1191@itemx -dn
1192@itemx -non_shared
1193@itemx -static
1194Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1195platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1196variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1197may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1198library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1199option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1200option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1201shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1202references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1203libraries.
252b5132
RH
1204
1205@kindex -Bsymbolic
1206@item -Bsymbolic
1207When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1208definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1209for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1210within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1211platforms which support shared libraries.
1212
40b36307
L
1213@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1214@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1215When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1216symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1217This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1218libraries.
1219
55255dae
L
1220@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1221@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1222Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1223typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1224global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1225within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1226to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1227in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1228which support shared libraries.
1229
1230The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1231scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1232
40b36307
L
1233@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1234@item --dynamic-list-data
1235Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1236
1237@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1238@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1239Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1240is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1241
0b8a70d9
L
1242@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1243@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1244Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1245
252b5132
RH
1246@kindex --check-sections
1247@kindex --no-check-sections
1248@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1249@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1250Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1251been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1252perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1253suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1254allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1255restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1256Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1257force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1258option.
252b5132 1259
ddbb8a31
NC
1260@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1261@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1262@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1263@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1264This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1265by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1266command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1267output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1268input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1269specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1270follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1271behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1272
1273This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1274libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1275mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1276their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1277required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1278the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1279dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1280symbols.
1281
252b5132
RH
1282@cindex cross reference table
1283@kindex --cref
1284@item --cref
1285Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1286generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1287Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1288
1289The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1290easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1291sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1292symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1293definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1294
4818e05f
AM
1295@cindex common allocation
1296@kindex --no-define-common
1297@item --no-define-common
1298This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1299The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1300@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1301
1302The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1303the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1304of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1305forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1306Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1307from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1308This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1309and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1310duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1311paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1312
252b5132 1313@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1314@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1315@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1316Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1317address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1318times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1319limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1320context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1321symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1322constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1323using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1324Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1325space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1326@var{expression}.
1327
1328@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1329@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1330@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1331@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1332@itemx --no-demangle
1333These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1334and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1335present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1336underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1337mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1338different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1339to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1340demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1341is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1342
1343@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1344@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1345@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1346@item -I@var{file}
1347@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1348Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1349generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1350linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1351doing.
1352
7ce691ae 1353@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1354@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1355@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1356@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1357Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1358with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1359
252b5132
RH
1360@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1361@item --force-exe-suffix
1362Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1363
1364If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1365@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1366the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1367option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1368Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1369it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1370
1371@kindex --gc-sections
1372@kindex --no-gc-sections
1373@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1374@item --gc-sections
1375@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1376Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1377targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1378performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1379@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1380
d5465ba2
AM
1381@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1382examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1383symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1384command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1385referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1386libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1387referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1388the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1389relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1390
ac69cbc6 1391This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
fc073cb7 1392@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1393specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1394a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1395
c17d87de
NC
1396@kindex --print-gc-sections
1397@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1398@cindex garbage collection
1399@item --print-gc-sections
1400@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1401List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1402printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1403collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1404default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1405be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1406line.
1407
30824704
RM
1408@kindex --print-output-format
1409@cindex output format
1410@item --print-output-format
1411Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1412other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1413in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1414
252b5132
RH
1415@cindex help
1416@cindex usage
1417@kindex --help
1418@item --help
1419Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1420
ea20a7da
CC
1421@kindex --target-help
1422@item --target-help
1423Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1424
2509a395
SL
1425@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1426@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1427Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1428@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1429
1430@cindex memory usage
1431@kindex --no-keep-memory
1432@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1433@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1434symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1435instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1436necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1437while linking a large executable.
1438
1439@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1440@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1441@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1442@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1443Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1444is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1445The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1446behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1447libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1448
aa713662
L
1449@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1450@kindex -z muldefs
1451@item --allow-multiple-definition
1452@itemx -z muldefs
1453Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1454report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1455first definition will be used.
1456
b79e8c78 1457@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1458@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1459@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1460@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1461Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1462This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1463determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1464shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1465how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1466
903249d7
NC
1467The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1468referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1469an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1470a shared library.
1471
1472The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1473libraries specified at link time are that:
1474
1475@itemize @bullet
1476@item
1477A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1478that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1479resolvable at load time.
1480@item
1481There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1482symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1483
1484The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1485select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1486architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1487appropriate memset function.
1488@end itemize
b79e8c78 1489
31941635
L
1490@kindex --no-undefined-version
1491@item --no-undefined-version
1492Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1493it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1494will be issued instead.
1495
3e3b46e5
PB
1496@kindex --default-symver
1497@item --default-symver
1498Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1499exported symbols.
1500
1501@kindex --default-imported-symver
1502@item --default-imported-symver
1503Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1504imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1505
252b5132
RH
1506@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1507@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1508Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1509files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1510been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1511This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1512errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1513have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1514inappropriate.
1515
fe7929ce
AM
1516@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1517@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1518Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1519library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1520
252b5132
RH
1521@kindex --no-whole-archive
1522@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1523Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1524archive files.
1525
1526@cindex output file after errors
1527@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1528@item --noinhibit-exec
1529Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1530Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1531errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1532when it issues any error whatsoever.
1533
0a9c1c8e
CD
1534@kindex -nostdlib
1535@item -nostdlib
1536Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1537command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1538(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1539
252b5132 1540@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1541@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1542@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1543@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1544file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1545@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1546object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1547object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1548should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1549usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1550name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1551list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1552command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1553this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1554@end ifclear
1555
36af4a4e
JJ
1556@kindex -pie
1557@kindex --pic-executable
1558@item -pie
1559@itemx --pic-executable
1560@cindex position independent executables
1561Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1562ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1563libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1564address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1565normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1566defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1567
252b5132
RH
1568@kindex -qmagic
1569@item -qmagic
1570This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1571
1572@kindex -Qy
1573@item -Qy
1574This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1575
1576@kindex --relax
1577@cindex synthesizing linker
1578@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1579@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1580@item --relax
28d5f677 1581@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1582An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1583@ifset GENERIC
1584This option is only supported on a few targets.
1585@end ifset
1586@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1587@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1588@end ifset
1589@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1590@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1591@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1592@ifset XTENSA
1593@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1594@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1595@ifset M68HC11
1596@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1597@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1598@ifset POWERPC
1599@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1600@end ifset
252b5132 1601
28d5f677
NC
1602On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1603global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1604addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1605synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1606instructions, and combinig constant values.
252b5132
RH
1607
1608On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1609debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1610@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1611This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1612family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1613@end ifset
1614
1615@ifset GENERIC
1616On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1617but ignored.
1618@end ifset
1619
28d5f677
NC
1620On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1621@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1622
252b5132
RH
1623@cindex retaining specified symbols
1624@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1625@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1626@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1627@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1628Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1629discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1630symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1631@ifset GENERIC
1632(such as VxWorks)
1633@end ifset
1634where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1635run-time memory.
1636
1637@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1638or symbols needed for relocations.
1639
1640You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1641line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1642
1643@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1644@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1645@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1646@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1647Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1648linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1649arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1650them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1651also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1652objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1653@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1654ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1655@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1656
ff5dcc92 1657The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1658SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1659@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1660runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1661options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1662gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1663file systems.
252b5132 1664
ff5dcc92 1665For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1666followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1667the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1668@end ifset
1669
1670@ifset GENERIC
1671@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1672@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1673@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1674When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1675happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1676of the input files.
1677
1678When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1679non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1680shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1681explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1682specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1683@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1684either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1685appearing multiple times.
1686
28c309a2
NC
1687This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1688that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1689is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1690runtime linker would do.
1691
252b5132 1692The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1693libraries:
252b5132
RH
1694@enumerate
1695@item
ff5dcc92 1696Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1697@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1698Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1699between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1700specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1701used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1702at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1703by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1704the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1705@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1706On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1707@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1708environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1709@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1710On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1711directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1712@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1713For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1714variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1715@item
ec4eb78a
L
1716For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1717@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1718libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1719@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1720@item
252b5132
RH
1721The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1722@item
1723For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1724exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1725@end enumerate
1726
1727If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1728warning and continue with the link.
1729@end ifset
1730
1731@kindex -shared
1732@kindex -Bshareable
1733@item -shared
1734@itemx -Bshareable
1735@cindex shared libraries
1736Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1737and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1738shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1739undefined symbols in the link.
1740
252b5132 1741@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1742@item --sort-common
1743@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1744@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1745This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1746ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1747sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1748eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1749between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1750specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1751
2509a395
SL
1752@kindex --sort-section=name
1753@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1754This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1755patterns in the linker script.
1756
2509a395
SL
1757@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1758@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1759This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1760patterns in the linker script.
1761
252b5132 1762@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1763@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1764Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1765each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1766size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1767
1768@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1769@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1770Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1771output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1772This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1773certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1774cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1775that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1776support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1777input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1778more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1779many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1780
1781@kindex --stats
1782@item --stats
1783Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1784as execution time and memory usage.
1785
2509a395 1786@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1787@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1788Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1789configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1790that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1791
252b5132
RH
1792@kindex --traditional-format
1793@cindex traditional format
1794@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1795For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1796the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1797use the traditional format instead.
1798
1799@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1800For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1801symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1802full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1803@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1804trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1805combine duplicate entries.
1806
2509a395
SL
1807@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1808@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1809Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1810address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1811times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1812line.
1813@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1814for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1815@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1816should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1817sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1818
2509a395
SL
1819@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1820@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1821@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1822@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1823@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1824@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1825@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1826Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1827@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1828
2509a395
SL
1829@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1830@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1831@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1832When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1833of the first byte of the text segment.
1834
560e09e9
NC
1835@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1836@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1837Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1838values for @samp{method}:
1839
1840@table @samp
1841@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1842Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1843
1844@item report-all
da8bce14 1845Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1846
1847@item ignore-in-object-files
1848Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1849ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1850
1851@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1852Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1853ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1854when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1855libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1856command line.
1857@end table
1858
1859The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1860by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1861
1862Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1863unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1864can change this to a warning.
1865
1715a13c
L
1866@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1867@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1868@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1869@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1870Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1871supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1872the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1873argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1874
1875@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1876@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1877@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1878Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1879used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1880about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1881is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1882see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1883use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1884symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1885@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1886
7ce691ae 1887@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1888@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1889@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1890@item --warn-common
1891Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1892a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1893but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1894you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1895Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1896warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1897
1898There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1899
1900@table @samp
1901@item int i = 1;
1902A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1903file.
1904
1905@item extern int i;
1906An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1907There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1908variable somewhere.
1909
1910@item int i;
1911A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1912variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1913The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1914single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1915size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1916a definition of the same variable.
1917@end table
1918
1919The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1920Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1921just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1922encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1923a common symbol.
1924
1925@enumerate
1926@item
1927Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1928definition for the symbol.
1929@smallexample
1930@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1931 overridden by definition
1932@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1933@end smallexample
1934
1935@item
1936Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1937the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1938except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1939@smallexample
1940@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1941 overriding common
1942@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1943@end smallexample
1944
1945@item
1946Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1947@smallexample
1948@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1949 of `@var{symbol}'
1950@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1951@end smallexample
1952
1953@item
1954Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1955@smallexample
1956@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1957 overridden by larger common
1958@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1959@end smallexample
1960
1961@item
1962Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1963the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1964encountered in a different order.
1965@smallexample
1966@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1967 overriding smaller common
1968@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1969@end smallexample
1970@end enumerate
1971
1972@kindex --warn-constructors
1973@item --warn-constructors
1974Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1975object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1976detect the use of global constructors.
1977
1978@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1979@item --warn-multiple-gp
1980Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1981This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1982Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1983section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1984of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1985base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1986base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1987bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1988large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1989values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1990option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1991
1992@kindex --warn-once
1993@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1994@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1995@item --warn-once
1996Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1997which refers to it.
1998
1999@kindex --warn-section-align
2000@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2001@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2002@item --warn-section-align
2003Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2004alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2005The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2006is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2007the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2008
8fdd7217
NC
2009@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2010@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2011Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2012
a0c402a5
L
2013@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2014@item --warn-alternate-em
2015Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2016
560e09e9
NC
2017@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2018@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2019If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2020@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2021This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2022
2023@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2024@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2025This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2026it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2027
252b5132
RH
2028@kindex --whole-archive
2029@cindex including an entire archive
2030@item --whole-archive
2031For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2032@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2033in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2034files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2035library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2036library. This option may be used more than once.
2037
7ec229ce 2038Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2039about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2040Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2041list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2042your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2043
2509a395
SL
2044@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2045@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2046Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2047@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2048undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2049@var{symbol}.
2050
2051This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2052wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2053wishes to call the system function, it should call
2054@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2055
2056Here is a trivial example:
2057
2058@smallexample
2059void *
cc2f008e 2060__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2061@{
cc2f008e 2062 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2063 return __real_malloc (c);
2064@}
2065@end smallexample
2066
ff5dcc92 2067If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2068all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2069instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2070call the real @code{malloc} function.
2071
2072You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2073links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2074you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2075file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2076call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2077
6aa29e7b
JJ
2078@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2079@item --eh-frame-hdr
2080Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2081@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2082
e41b3a13
JJ
2083@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2084@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2085Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2086generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2087if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2088
6c1439be
L
2089@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2090@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2091@item --enable-new-dtags
2092@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2093This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2094systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2095@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2096If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2097created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2098those options are only available for ELF systems.
2099
2d643429 2100@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2101@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2102Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2103close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2104time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2105increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2106value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2107
fdc90cb4
JJ
2108@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2109@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2110Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2111@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2112new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2113the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2114hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2115
35835446
JR
2116@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2117@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2118This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2119linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2120for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2121about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2122
4f9c04f7 2123Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21241021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2125run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2126has been used.
2127
2128The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2129enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2130
c0065db7
RM
2131@kindex --build-id
2132@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2133@item --build-id
2134@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2135Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2136The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2137file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2138@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2139parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2140@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2141@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2142an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2143characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2144omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2145
2146The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2147that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2148unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2149to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2150file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2151string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2152
2153Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2154@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2155@end table
2156
0285c67d
NC
2157@c man end
2158
36f63dca 2159@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2160
0285c67d
NC
2161@c man begin OPTIONS
2162
ff5dcc92 2163The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2164the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2165normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2166use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2167@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2168like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2169symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2170object file).
2171
2172In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2173support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2174PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2175values by either a space or an equals sign.
2176
ff5dcc92 2177@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2178
2179@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2180@item --add-stdcall-alias
2181If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2182as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2183[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2184
2185@kindex --base-file
2186@item --base-file @var{file}
2187Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2188addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2189@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2190[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2191
2192@kindex --dll
2193@item --dll
2194Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2195@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2196file.
bb10df36 2197[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2198
88183869
DK
2199@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2200@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2201@item --enable-long-section-names
2202@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2203The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2204the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2205for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2206fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2207to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2208allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2209disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2210generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2211as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2212with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2213GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2214information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2215option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2216section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2217when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2218image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2219[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2220
252b5132
RH
2221@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2222@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2223@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2224@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2225If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2226do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2227only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2228resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2229undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2230@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2231to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2232warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2233import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2234to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2235feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2236@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2237mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2238[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2239
522f09cd
KT
2240@kindex --leading-underscore
2241@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2242@item --leading-underscore
2243@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2244For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2245in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2246disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2247
252b5132
RH
2248@cindex DLLs, creating
2249@kindex --export-all-symbols
2250@item --export-all-symbols
2251If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2252be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2253otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2254explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2255attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2256option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2257@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2258@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2259exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2260re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2261such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2262@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2263@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2264Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2265not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2266extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2267(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2268These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2269@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2270@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2271@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2272@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2273[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2274
2275@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2276@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2277Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2278exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2279[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2280
2927aaca
NC
2281@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2282@item --exclude-all-symbols
2283Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2284[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2285
252b5132
RH
2286@kindex --file-alignment
2287@item --file-alignment
2288Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2289file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2290512.
bb10df36 2291[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2292
2293@cindex heap size
2294@kindex --heap
2295@item --heap @var{reserve}
2296@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2297Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2298to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2299committed.
bb10df36 2300[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2301
2302@cindex image base
2303@kindex --image-base
2304@item --image-base @var{value}
2305Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2306the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2307is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2308your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2309other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2310for dlls.
bb10df36 2311[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2312
2313@kindex --kill-at
2314@item --kill-at
2315If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2316symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2317[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2318
26d2d8a2
BF
2319@kindex --large-address-aware
2320@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2321If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2322header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2323greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2324or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2325section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2326[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2327
252b5132
RH
2328@kindex --major-image-version
2329@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2330Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2331[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2332
2333@kindex --major-os-version
2334@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2335Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2336[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2337
2338@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2339@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2340Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2341[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2342
2343@kindex --minor-image-version
2344@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2345Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2346[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2347
2348@kindex --minor-os-version
2349@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2350Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2351[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2352
2353@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2354@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2355Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2356[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2357
2358@cindex DEF files, creating
2359@cindex DLLs, creating
2360@kindex --output-def
2361@item --output-def @var{file}
2362The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2363file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2364(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2365library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2366automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2367[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2368
b044cda1
CW
2369@cindex DLLs, creating
2370@kindex --out-implib
2371@item --out-implib @var{file}
2372The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2373import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2374import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2375may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2376makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2377creation step.
bb10df36 2378[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2379
2380@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2381@item --enable-auto-image-base
2382Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2383using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2384from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2385collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2386avoided.
bb10df36 2387[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2388
2389@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2390@item --disable-auto-image-base
2391Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2392user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2393default.
bb10df36 2394[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2395
2396@cindex DLLs, linking to
2397@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2398@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2399When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2400search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2401@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2402between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2403uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2404@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2405[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2406
2407@kindex --enable-auto-import
2408@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2409Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2410DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2411building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2412'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2413to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2414specification published by Microsoft.
2415
e2a83dd0
NC
2416Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2417data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2418placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2419around a problem with consts that is described here:
2420http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2421
4d8907ac
DS
2422Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2423see this message:
0d888aac 2424
ece2d90e 2425"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2426documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2427
ece2d90e
NC
2428This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2429ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2430allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2431fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2432constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2433multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2434this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2435of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2436the warning, and exit.
2437
2438There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2439data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2440
2fa9fc65
NC
2441One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2442of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2443this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2444
c0065db7
RM
2445A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2446that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2447there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2448a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2449
2450@example
2451extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2452extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2453 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2454@end example
2455
2456or
2457
2458@example
2459extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2460extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2461 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2462@end example
2463
c0065db7 2464For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2465is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2466
2467@example
2468extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2469extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2470 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2471@end example
2472
c406afaf
NC
2473or
2474
2475@example
2476extern long long extern_ll;
2477extern_ll -->
2478 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2479@end example
2480
2fa9fc65 2481A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2482'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2483@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2484requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2485building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2486merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2487between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2488constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2489
2490Original:
2491@example
2492--foo.h
2493extern int arr[];
2494--foo.c
2495#include "foo.h"
2496void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2497 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2498@}
2499@end example
2500
2501Solution 1:
2502@example
2503--foo.h
2504extern int arr[];
2505--foo.c
2506#include "foo.h"
2507void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2508 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2509 volatile int *parr = arr;
2510 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2511@}
2512@end example
2513
2514Solution 2:
2515@example
2516--foo.h
2517/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2518#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2519 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2520#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2521#else
2522#define FOO_IMPORT
2523#endif
2524extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2525--foo.c
2526#include "foo.h"
2527void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2528 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2529@}
2530@end example
2531
c0065db7 2532A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2533library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2534for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2535functions).
bb10df36 2536[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2537
2538@kindex --disable-auto-import
2539@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2540Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2541@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2542[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2543
2fa9fc65
NC
2544@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2545@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2546If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2547that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2548a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2549environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2550[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2551
2552@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2553@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2554Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2555DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2556[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2557
b044cda1
CW
2558@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2559@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2560Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2561[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2562
252b5132
RH
2563@kindex --section-alignment
2564@item --section-alignment
2565Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2566addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2567[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2568
2569@cindex stack size
2570@kindex --stack
2571@item --stack @var{reserve}
2572@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2573Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2574to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2575committed.
bb10df36 2576[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2577
2578@kindex --subsystem
2579@item --subsystem @var{which}
2580@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2581@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2582Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2583legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2584@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2585the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2586@var{which}.
bb10df36 2587[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2588
2f563b51
DK
2589The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2590of the PE file header:
2591[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2592
2593@kindex --dynamicbase
2594@item --dynamicbase
2595The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2596randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2597Vista for i386 PE targets.
2598
2599@kindex --forceinteg
2600@item --forceinteg
2601Code integrity checks are enforced.
2602
2603@kindex --nxcompat
2604@item --nxcompat
2605The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2606This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2607
2608@kindex --no-isolation
2609@item --no-isolation
2610Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2611
2612@kindex --no-seh
2613@item --no-seh
2614The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2615this image.
2616
2617@kindex --no-bind
2618@item --no-bind
2619Do not bind this image.
2620
2621@kindex --wdmdriver
2622@item --wdmdriver
2623The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2624
2625@kindex --tsaware
2626@item --tsaware
2627The image is Terminal Server aware.
2628
252b5132
RH
2629@end table
2630
0285c67d
NC
2631@c man end
2632
ac145307
BS
2633@ifset C6X
2634@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2635
2636@c man begin OPTIONS
2637
2638The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2639libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2640all executables use an index of 0.
2641
2642@table @gcctabopt
2643
2644@kindex --dsbt-size
2645@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2646This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2647or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2648entries.
2649
2650@kindex --dsbt-index
2651@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2652This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2653to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2654executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2655@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2656
fbd9ad90
PB
2657@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2658The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2659exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2660
ac145307
BS
2661@end table
2662
2663@c man end
2664@end ifset
2665
93fd0973
SC
2666@ifset M68HC11
2667@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2668
2669@c man begin OPTIONS
2670
2671The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2672memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2673
2674@table @gcctabopt
2675
2676@kindex --no-trampoline
2677@item --no-trampoline
2678This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2679is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2680instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2681
2682@kindex --bank-window
2683@item --bank-window @var{name}
2684This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2685the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2686The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2687paging and addresses within the memory window.
2688
2689@end table
2690
2691@c man end
2692@end ifset
2693
7fb9f789
NC
2694@ifset M68K
2695@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2696
2697@c man begin OPTIONS
2698
2699The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2700when linking for 68K targets.
2701
2702@table @gcctabopt
2703
2704@kindex --got
2705@item --got=@var{type}
2706This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2707@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2708@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2709Info entry for @file{ld}.
2710
2711@end table
2712
2713@c man end
2714@end ifset
2715
252b5132
RH
2716@ifset UsesEnvVars
2717@node Environment
2718@section Environment Variables
2719
0285c67d
NC
2720@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2721
560e09e9 2722You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2723@ifclear SingleFormat
2724@code{GNUTARGET},
2725@end ifclear
2726@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2727
36f63dca 2728@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2729@kindex GNUTARGET
2730@cindex default input format
2731@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2732use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2733of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2734@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2735of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2736attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2737this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2738there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2739object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2740BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2741in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2742@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2743
2744@kindex LDEMULATION
2745@cindex default emulation
2746@cindex emulation, default
2747@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2748@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2749behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2750available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2751the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2752variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2753linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2754
2755@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2756@cindex demangling, default
2757Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2758@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2759default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2760a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2761may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2762options.
2763
0285c67d
NC
2764@c man end
2765@end ifset
2766
252b5132
RH
2767@node Scripts
2768@chapter Linker Scripts
2769
2770@cindex scripts
2771@cindex linker scripts
2772@cindex command files
2773Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2774written in the linker command language.
2775
2776The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2777the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2778the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2779more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2780direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2781described below.
2782
2783The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2784yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2785linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2786to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2787such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2788
2789You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2790line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2791default linker script.
2792
2793You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2794to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2795Linker Scripts}.
2796
2797@menu
2798* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2799* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2800* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2801* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2802* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2803* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2804* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2805* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2806* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2807* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2808* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2809@end menu
2810
2811@node Basic Script Concepts
2812@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2813@cindex linker script concepts
2814We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2815describe the linker script language.
2816
2817The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2818file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2819@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2820The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2821purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2822among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2823section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2824in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2825
2826Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2827also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2828contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2829the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2830A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2831area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2832loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2833which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2834of debugging information.
2835
2836Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2837first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2838the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2839@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2840section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2841same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2842is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2843(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2844based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2845RAM address would be the VMA.
2846
2847You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2848program with the @samp{-h} option.
2849
2850Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2851@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2852has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2853information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2854will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2855static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2856referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2857
2858You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2859program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2860option.
2861
2862@node Script Format
2863@section Linker Script Format
2864@cindex linker script format
2865Linker scripts are text files.
2866
2867You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2868either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2869symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2870generally ignored.
2871
2872Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2873If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2874otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2875double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2876file name.
2877
2878You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2879@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2880to whitespace.
2881
2882@node Simple Example
2883@section Simple Linker Script Example
2884@cindex linker script example
2885@cindex example of linker script
2886Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2887
2888The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2889@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2890memory layout of the output file.
2891
2892The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2893describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2894code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2895@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2896Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2897your input files.
2898
2899For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
29000x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2901linker script which will do that:
2902@smallexample
2903SECTIONS
2904@{
2905 . = 0x10000;
2906 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2907 . = 0x8000000;
2908 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2909 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2910@}
2911@end smallexample
2912
2913You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2914followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2915descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2916
252b5132
RH
2917The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2918sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2919counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2920other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2921current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2922incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2923@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2924
2925The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2926required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2927after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2928which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2929wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2930means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2931
2932Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2933@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2934@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2935
2936The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2937the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2938at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2939output section, the value of the location counter will be
2940@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2941effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2942immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2943
2944The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2945alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2946example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2947sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2948may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2949sections.
2950
2951That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2952
2953@node Simple Commands
2954@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2955@cindex linker script simple commands
2956In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2957
2958@menu
2959* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2960* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2961@ifclear SingleFormat
2962* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2963@end ifclear
2964
4a93e180 2965* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2966* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2967@end menu
2968
2969@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2970@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2971@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2972@cindex start of execution
2973@cindex first instruction
2974@cindex entry point
2975The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2976point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2977entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2978@smallexample
2979ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2980@end smallexample
2981
2982There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2983entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2984stopping when one of them succeeds:
2985@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2986@item
252b5132 2987the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2988@item
252b5132 2989the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2990@item
3ab904c4
NC
2991the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2992targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2993check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 2994@item
252b5132 2995the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2996@item
252b5132
RH
2997The address @code{0}.
2998@end itemize
2999
3000@node File Commands
36f63dca 3001@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3002@cindex linker script file commands
3003Several linker script commands deal with files.
3004
3005@table @code
3006@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3007@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3008@cindex including a linker script
3009Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3010be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3011with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
301210 levels deep.
3013
4006703d
NS
3014You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3015@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3016
252b5132
RH
3017@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3018@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3019@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3020@cindex input files in linker scripts
3021@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3022@cindex linker script input object files
3023The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3024in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3025
3026For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3027a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3028then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3029
3030In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3031script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3032
e3f2db7f
AO
3033In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3034with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3035located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3036for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3037open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3038linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3039description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3040
ff5dcc92 3041If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3042name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3043@samp{-l}.
3044
3045When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3046files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3047script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3048
3049@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3050@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3051@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3052@cindex grouping input files
3053The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3054files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3055new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3056in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3057
b717d30e
JJ
3058@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3059@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3060@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3061This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3062commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3063as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3064with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3065when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3066@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3067and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3068setting afterwards.
3069
252b5132
RH
3070@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3071@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3072@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3073The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3074@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3075@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3076Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3077precedence.
3078
3079You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3080output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3081
3082@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3083@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3084@cindex library search path in linker script
3085@cindex archive search path in linker script
3086@cindex search path in linker script
3087The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3088@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3089@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3090on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3091are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3092the command line option are searched first.
3093
3094@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3095@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3096@cindex first input file
3097The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3098that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3099though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3100when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3101first file.
3102@end table
3103
3104@ifclear SingleFormat
3105@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3106@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3107A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3108
3109@table @code
3110@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3111@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3112@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3113@cindex output file format in linker script
3114The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3115output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3116exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3117(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3118line option takes precedence.
3119
3120You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3121formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3122This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3123desired endianness.
3124
3125If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3126will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3127output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3128used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3129
3130For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3131command:
3132@smallexample
3133OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3134@end smallexample
3135This says that the default format for the output file is
3136@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3137option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3138format.
3139
3140@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3141@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3142@cindex input file format in linker script
3143The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3144files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3145This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3146(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3147is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3148command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3149@end table
3150@end ifclear
3151
4a93e180
NC
3152@node REGION_ALIAS
3153@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3154@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3155@cindex region alias
3156@cindex region names
3157
3158Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3159@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3160
3161@smallexample
3162REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3163@end smallexample
3164
3165The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3166memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3167to memory regions. An example follows.
3168
3169Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3170memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3171that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3172non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3173access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3174read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3175sections:
3176
3177@itemize @bullet
3178@item
3179@code{.text} program code;
3180@item
3181@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3182@item
3183@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3184@item
3185@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3186@end itemize
3187
3188The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3189part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3190output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3191systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3192@code{C}:
3193@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3194@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3195@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3196@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3197@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3198@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3199@end multitable
3200The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3201loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3202the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3203the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3204
3205The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3206includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3207memory layout:
3208@smallexample
3209INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3210
3211SECTIONS
3212 @{
3213 .text :
3214 @{
3215 *(.text)
3216 @} > REGION_TEXT
3217 .rodata :
3218 @{
3219 *(.rodata)
3220 rodata_end = .;
3221 @} > REGION_RODATA
3222 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3223 @{
3224 data_start = .;
3225 *(.data)
3226 @} > REGION_DATA
3227 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3228 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3229 .bss :
3230 @{
3231 *(.bss)
3232 @} > REGION_BSS
3233 @}
3234@end smallexample
3235
3236Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3237regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3238variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3239@table @code
3240@item A
3241Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3242@smallexample
3243MEMORY
3244 @{
3245 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3246 @}
3247
3248REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3249REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3250REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3251REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3252@end smallexample
3253@item B
3254Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3255into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3256@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3257@smallexample
3258MEMORY
3259 @{
3260 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3261 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3262 @}
3263
3264REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3265REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3266REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3267REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3268@end smallexample
3269@item C
3270Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3271@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3272initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3273system start into the @code{RAM}.
3274@smallexample
3275MEMORY
3276 @{
3277 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3278 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3279 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3280 @}
3281
3282REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3283REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3284REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3285REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3286@end smallexample
3287@end table
3288
3289It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3290@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3291necessary:
3292@smallexample
3293#include <string.h>
3294
3295extern char data_start [];
3296extern char data_size [];
3297extern char data_load_start [];
3298
3299void copy_data(void)
3300@{
3301 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3302 @{
3303 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3304 @}
3305@}
3306@end smallexample
3307
252b5132 3308@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3309@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3310There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3311
3312@table @code
3313@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3314@kindex ASSERT
3315@cindex assertion in linker script
3316Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3317with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3318
3319@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3320@kindex EXTERN
3321@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3322Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3323symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3324modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3325each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3326command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3327
3328@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3329@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3330@cindex common allocation in linker script
3331This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3332to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3333output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3334
4818e05f
AM
3335@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3336@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3337@cindex common allocation in linker script
3338This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3339command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3340to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3341
53d25da6
AM
3342@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3343@kindex INSERT
3344@cindex insert user script into default script
3345This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3346augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3347inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3348@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3349default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3350sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3351linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3352insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3353linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3354default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3355of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3356to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3357is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3358
3359@smallexample
3360SECTIONS
3361@{
3362 OVERLAY :
3363 @{
3364 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3365 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3366 @}
3367@}
3368INSERT AFTER .text;
3369@end smallexample
3370
252b5132
RH
3371@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3372@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3373@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3374This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3375references among certain output sections.
3376
3377In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3378using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3379will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3380errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3381a function defined in the other section.
3382
3383The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3384@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3385an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3386@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3387names.
3388
3389@ifclear SingleFormat
3390@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3391@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3392@cindex machine architecture
3393@cindex architecture
3394Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3395of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3396architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3397the @samp{-f} option.
3398@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3399
3400@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3401@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3402This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3403@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3404in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3405@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3406@end table
3407
3408@node Assignments
3409@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3410@cindex assignment in scripts
3411@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3412@cindex variables, defining
3413You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3414the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3415
3416@menu
3417* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3418* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3419* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3420* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3421* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3422@end menu
3423
3424@node Simple Assignments
3425@subsection Simple Assignments
3426
3427You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3428
3429@table @code
3430@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3431@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3432@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3433@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3434@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3435@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3436@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3437@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3438@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3439@end table
3440
3441The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3442@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3443defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3444
3445The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3446may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3447
3448The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3449
3450Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3451
3452You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3453statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3454section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3455
3456The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3457expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3458
3459Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3460assignments may be used:
3461
3462@smallexample
3463floating_point = 0;
3464SECTIONS
3465@{
3466 .text :
3467 @{
3468 *(.text)
3469 _etext = .;
3470 @}
156e34dd 3471 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3472 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3473@}
3474@end smallexample
3475@noindent
3476In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3477zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3478the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3479defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3480upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3481
eb8476a6
MR
3482@node HIDDEN
3483@subsection HIDDEN
3484@cindex HIDDEN
3485For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3486exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3487
3488Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3489@code{HIDDEN}:
3490
3491@smallexample
3492HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3493SECTIONS
3494@{
3495 .text :
3496 @{
3497 *(.text)
3498 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3499 @}
3500 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3501 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3502@}
3503@end smallexample
3504@noindent
3505In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3506
252b5132
RH
3507@node PROVIDE
3508@subsection PROVIDE
3509@cindex PROVIDE
3510In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3511only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3512the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3513@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3514@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3515@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3516@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3517@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3518
3519Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3520@smallexample
3521SECTIONS
3522@{
3523 .text :
3524 @{
3525 *(.text)
3526 _etext = .;
3527 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3528 @}
3529@}
3530@end smallexample
3531
3532In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3533underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3534the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3535underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3536If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3537linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3538
7af8e998
L
3539@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3540@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3541@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3542Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3543hidden and won't be exported.
3544
73ae6183
NC
3545@node Source Code Reference
3546@subsection Source Code Reference
3547
3548Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3549intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3550a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3551symbol that does not have a value.
3552
3553Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3554transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3555stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3556prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3557mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3558of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3559variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3560linker script variable might be referred to as:
3561
3562@smallexample
3563 extern int foo;
3564@end smallexample
3565
3566But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3567
3568@smallexample
3569 _foo = 1000;
3570@end smallexample
3571
3572In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3573transformation has taken place.
3574
3575When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3576things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3577in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3578second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3579table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3580contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3581value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3582
3583@smallexample
3584 int foo = 1000;
3585@end smallexample
3586
3587creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3588holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3589number 1000 is initially stored.
3590
3591When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3592first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3593memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3594So:
3595
3596@smallexample
3597 foo = 1;
3598@end smallexample
3599
3600looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3601associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3602address. Whereas:
3603
3604@smallexample
3605 int * a = & foo;
3606@end smallexample
3607
3608looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3609and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3610the variable @samp{a}.
3611
3612Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3613the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3614an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3615
3616@smallexample
3617 foo = 1000;
3618@end smallexample
3619
3620creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3621the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3622address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3623linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3624access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3625
3626Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3627you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3628use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3629section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3630linker script contains these declarations:
3631
3632@smallexample
3633@group
3634 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3635 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3636 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3637@end group
3638@end smallexample
3639
3640Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3641
3642@smallexample
3643@group
3644 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3645
73ae6183
NC
3646 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3647@end group
3648@end smallexample
3649
3650Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3651
252b5132 3652@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3653@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3654@kindex SECTIONS
3655The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3656into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3657
3658The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3659@smallexample
3660SECTIONS
3661@{
3662 @var{sections-command}
3663 @var{sections-command}
3664 @dots{}
3665@}
3666@end smallexample
3667
3668Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3669
3670@itemize @bullet
3671@item
3672an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3673@item
3674a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3675@item
3676an output section description
3677@item
3678an overlay description
3679@end itemize
3680
3681The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3682@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3683those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3684understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3685the layout of the output file.
3686
3687Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3688below.
3689
3690If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3691linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3692section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3693input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3694example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3695in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3696
3697@menu
3698* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3699* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3700* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3701* Input Section:: Input section description
3702* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3703* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3704* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3705* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3706* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3707@end menu
3708
3709@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3710@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3711The full description of an output section looks like this:
3712@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3713@group
7e7d5768 3714@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3715 [AT(@var{lma})]
3716 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3717 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3718 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3719 @{
3720 @var{output-section-command}
3721 @var{output-section-command}
3722 @dots{}
562d3460 3723 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3724@end group
3725@end smallexample
3726
3727Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3728
3729The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3730name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3731The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3732
3733Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3734
3735@itemize @bullet
3736@item
3737a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3738@item
3739an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3740@item
3741data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3742@item
3743a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3744@end itemize
3745
3746@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3747@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3748@cindex name, section
3749@cindex section name
3750The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3751meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3752support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3753must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3754example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3755output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3756names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3757quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3758characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3759commas must be quoted.
3760
3761The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3762Discarding}.
3763
3764@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3765@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3766@cindex address, section
3767@cindex section address
3768The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3769address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3770is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3771
3772If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3773section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3774to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3775alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3776contained within the output section.
3777
3778The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3779
3780@itemize @bullet
3781@item
3782If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3783is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3784in that region.
3785
3786@item
3787If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3788regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3789section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3790be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3791
3792@item
3793If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3794the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3795counter.
3796@end itemize
3797
3798@noindent
3799For example:
3800
252b5132
RH
3801@smallexample
3802.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3803@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3804
252b5132
RH
3805@noindent
3806and
ea5cae92 3807
252b5132
RH
3808@smallexample
3809.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3810@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3811
252b5132
RH
3812@noindent
3813are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3814@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3815counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3816counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3817input sections.
252b5132
RH
3818
3819The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3820For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3821so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3822do something like this:
3823@smallexample
3824.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3825@end smallexample
3826@noindent
3827This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3828aligned upward to the specified value.
3829
3830Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3831location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3832sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3833
3834@node Input Section
36f63dca 3835@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3836@cindex input sections
3837@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3838The most common output section command is an input section description.
3839
3840The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3841You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3842in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3843map the input files into your memory layout.
3844
3845@menu
3846* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3847* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3848* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3849* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3850* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3851@end menu
3852
3853@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3854@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3855@cindex input section basics
3856An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3857by a list of section names in parentheses.
3858
3859The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3860describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3861
3862The most common input section description is to include all input
3863sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3864include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3865@smallexample
3866*(.text)
3867@end smallexample
3868@noindent
18625d54
CM
3869Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3870of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3871match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3872example:
252b5132 3873@smallexample
b4346c09 3874*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3875@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3876will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3877@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3878
3879There are two ways to include more than one section:
3880@smallexample
3881*(.text .rdata)
3882*(.text) *(.rdata)
3883@end smallexample
3884@noindent
3885The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3886@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3887first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3888they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3889@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3890@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3891
3892You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3893You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3894needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3895@smallexample
3896data.o(.data)
3897@end smallexample
3898
ae17ab41
CM
3899To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3900of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3901
3902Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3903
3904@smallexample
3905@group
3906SECTIONS @{
3907 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3908 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3909@}
3910@end group
3911@end smallexample
3912
3913In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3914input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3915@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3916@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3917whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3918
967928e9
AM
3919You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3920matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3921with no whitespace around the colon.
3922
3923@table @samp
3924@item archive:file
3925matches file within archive
3926@item archive:
3927matches the whole archive
3928@item :file
3929matches file but not one in an archive
3930@end table
3931
3932Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3933wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3934single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3935@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3936within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3937also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3938other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3939from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3940command.
3941
252b5132
RH
3942If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3943the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3944commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3945@smallexample
3946data.o
3947@end smallexample
3948
967928e9
AM
3949When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3950and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3951characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3952name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3953did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3954though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3955@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3956the archive search path.
3957
3958@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3959@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3960@cindex input section wildcards
3961@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3962@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3963@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3964In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3965name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3966
3967The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3968pattern for the file name.
3969
3970The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3971
3972@table @samp
3973@item *
3974matches any number of characters
3975@item ?
3976matches any single character
3977@item [@var{chars}]
3978matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3979character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3980@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3981@item \
3982quotes the following character
3983@end table
3984
3985When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3986will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3987Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3988exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3989@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3990a @samp{/} character.
3991
3992File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3993specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3994does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3995
3996If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3997appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3998will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3999sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4000@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4001@smallexample
4002.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4003.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4004@end smallexample
4005
bcaa7b3e 4006@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4007Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4008in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4009this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4010pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4011@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4012into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4013
bcaa7b3e
L
4014@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4015@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4016difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4017ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4018
02ecc8e9
L
4019@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4020@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4021difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4022ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4023encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4024
bcaa7b3e
L
4025@cindex SORT
4026@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4027
4028When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4029can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4030
4031@enumerate
4032@item
4033@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4034It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
4035sections have the same name.
4036@item
4037@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4038It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
4039sections have the same alignment.
4040@item
c0065db7 4041@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4042treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4043@item
4044@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4045is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4046@item
4047All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4048@end enumerate
4049
4050When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4051section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4052takes precedence over the command line option.
4053
4054If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4055command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4056treated as nested sorting command.
4057
4058@enumerate
4059@item
4060@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4061@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4062@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4063@item
4064@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4065@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4066@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4067@end enumerate
4068
4069If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4070command line option will be ignored.
4071
eda680f8
L
4072@cindex SORT_NONE
4073@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4074section sorting option.
4075
252b5132
RH
4076If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4077@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4078precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4079
4080This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4081files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4082sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4083The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4084with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4085linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4086@smallexample
4087@group
4088SECTIONS @{
4089 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4090 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4091 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4092 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4093@}
4094@end group
4095@end smallexample
4096
4097@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4098@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4099@cindex common symbol placement
4100@cindex uninitialized data placement
4101A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4102file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4103linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4104named @samp{COMMON}.
4105
4106You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4107other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4108particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4109input files are placed in another section.
4110
4111In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4112@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4113@smallexample
4114.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4115@end smallexample
4116
4117@cindex scommon section
4118@cindex small common symbols
4119Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4120example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4121symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4122different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4123the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4124symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4125to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4126locations.
4127
4128@cindex [COMMON]
4129You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4130notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4131@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4132
4133@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4134@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4135@cindex KEEP
4136@cindex garbage collection
4137When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4138it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4139This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4140with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4141@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4142
4143@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4144@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4145The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4146to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4147start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4148@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4149follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4150@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4151@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4152All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4153files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4154
4155@smallexample
4156@group
4157SECTIONS @{
4158 outputa 0x10000 :
4159 @{
4160 all.o
4161 foo.o (.input1)
4162 @}
36f63dca
NC
4163@end group
4164@group
252b5132
RH
4165 outputb :
4166 @{
4167 foo.o (.input2)
4168 foo1.o (.input1)
4169 @}
36f63dca
NC
4170@end group
4171@group
252b5132
RH
4172 outputc :
4173 @{
4174 *(.input1)
4175 *(.input2)
4176 @}
4177@}
4178@end group
a1ab1d2a 4179@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4180
4181@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4182@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4183@cindex data
4184@cindex section data
4185@cindex output section data
4186@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4187@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4188@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4189@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4190@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4191You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4192@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4193an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4194parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4195value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4196counter.
4197
4198The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4199store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4200bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4201stored.
4202
4203For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4204of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4205@smallexample
4206BYTE(1)
4207LONG(addr)
4208@end smallexample
4209
4210When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4211same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4212target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4213@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4214@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4215
4216If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4217which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4218When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4219true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4220endianness of the first input object file.
4221
36f63dca 4222Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4223between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4224@smallexample
4225SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4226@end smallexample
4227whereas this will work:
4228@smallexample
4229SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4230@end smallexample
4231
252b5132
RH
4232@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4233@cindex holes, filling
4234@cindex unspecified memory
4235You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4236current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4237otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4238gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4239with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4240necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4241point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4242than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4243different parts of an output section.
4244
4245This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4246value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4247@smallexample
563e308f 4248FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4249@end smallexample
4250
4251The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4252section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4253part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4254entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4255precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4256expression.
252b5132
RH
4257
4258@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4259@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4260There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4261commands.
4262
4263@table @code
4264@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4265@cindex input filename symbols
4266@cindex filename symbols
4267@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4268The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4269The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4270file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4271the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4272
4273This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4274normally used for any other object file format.
4275
4276@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4277@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4278@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4279@item CONSTRUCTORS
4280When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4281unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4282destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4283arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4284automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4285For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4286linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4287@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4288ignored for other object file formats.
4289
4290The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4291constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4292Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4293the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4294first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4295of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4296compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4297formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4298@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4299the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4300destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4301@code{exit}.
4302
4303For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4304arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4305addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4306and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4307linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4308runtime code expects to see.
4309
4310@smallexample
4311 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4312 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4313 *(.ctors)
4314 LONG(0)
4315 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4316 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4317 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4318 *(.dtors)
4319 LONG(0)
4320 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4321@end smallexample
4322
4323If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4324which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4325are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4326are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4327command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4328@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4329@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4330@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4331
4332Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4333and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4334need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4335scripts.
4336
4337@end table
4338
4339@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4340@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4341@cindex discarding sections
4342@cindex sections, discarding
4343@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4344The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4345for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4346be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4347@smallexample
49c13adb 4348.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4349@end smallexample
4350@noindent
4351will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4352@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4353sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4354space in an output section will also create the output section.
4355
a0976ea4 4356The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4357on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4358symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4359the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4360section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4361
4362@cindex /DISCARD/
4363The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4364input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4365section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4366
4367@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4368@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4369@cindex output section attributes
4370We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4371like this:
0c71d759 4372
252b5132 4373@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4374@group
7e7d5768 4375@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4376 [AT(@var{lma})]
4377 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4378 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4379 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4380 @{
4381 @var{output-section-command}
4382 @var{output-section-command}
4383 @dots{}
562d3460 4384 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4385@end group
4386@end smallexample
0c71d759 4387
252b5132
RH
4388We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4389@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4390remaining section attributes.
4391
a1ab1d2a 4392@menu
252b5132
RH
4393* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4394* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4395* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4396* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4397* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4398* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4399* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4400* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4401@end menu
4402
4403@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4404@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4405Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4406parentheses. The following types are defined:
4407
4408@table @code
4409@item NOLOAD
4410The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4411loaded into memory when the program is run.
4412@item DSECT
4413@itemx COPY
4414@itemx INFO
4415@itemx OVERLAY
4416These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4417rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4418marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4419section when the program is run.
4420@end table
4421
4422@kindex NOLOAD
4423@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4424@cindex loading, preventing
4425The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4426the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4427the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4428@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4429need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4430@smallexample
4431@group
4432SECTIONS @{
4433 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4434 @dots{}
4435@}
4436@end group
4437@end smallexample
4438
4439@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4440@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4441@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4442@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4443@cindex load address
4444@cindex section load address
4445Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4446@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4447@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4448specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4449address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4450
ea5cae92
NC
4451The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4452specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4453takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4454load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4455region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4456
4457If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4458section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4459load address:
4460
4461@itemize @bullet
4462@item
4463If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4464the LMA address as well.
4465
4466@item
4467If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4468
4469@item
4470Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4471with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4472section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4473VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4474the last section in the located region.
4475
4476@item
4477If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4478that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4479
4480@item
4481If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4482section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4483@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4484
4485@cindex ROM initialized data
4486@cindex initialized data in ROM
4487This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4488example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4489called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4490@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4491even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4492uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4493defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4494counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4495
4496@smallexample
4497@group
4498SECTIONS
4499 @{
4500 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4501 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4502 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4503 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4504 .bss 0x3000 :
4505 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4506@}
4507@end group
4508@end smallexample
4509
4510The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4511this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4512the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4513how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4514script.
4515
4516@smallexample
4517@group
4518extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4519char *src = &_etext;
4520char *dst = &_data;
4521
ea5cae92
NC
4522/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4523while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4524 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4525
ea5cae92 4526/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4527for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4528 *dst = 0;
4529@end group
4530@end smallexample
4531
bbf115d3
L
4532@node Forced Output Alignment
4533@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4534@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4535@cindex forcing output section alignment
4536@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4537You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4538
7e7d5768
AM
4539@node Forced Input Alignment
4540@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4541@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4542@cindex forcing input section alignment
4543@cindex input section alignment
4544You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4545SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4546sections, whether larger or smaller.
4547
0c71d759
NC
4548@node Output Section Constraint
4549@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4550@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4551@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4552@cindex constraints on output sections
4553You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4554of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4555read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4556@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4557
252b5132 4558@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4559@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4560@kindex >@var{region}
4561@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4562@cindex memory regions and sections
4563You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4564using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4565
4566Here is a simple example:
4567@smallexample
4568@group
4569MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4570SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4571@end group
4572@end smallexample
4573
4574@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4575@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4576@kindex :@var{phdr}
4577@cindex section, assigning to program header
4578@cindex program headers and sections
4579You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4580using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4581one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4582assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4583@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4584linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4585
4586Here is a simple example:
4587@smallexample
4588@group
4589PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4590SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4591@end group
4592@end smallexample
4593
4594@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4595@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4596@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4597@cindex section fill pattern
4598@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4599You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4600@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4601(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4602within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4603alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4604necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4605of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4606an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4607fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4608other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4609pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4610expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4611
4612You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4613output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4614
4615Here is a simple example:
4616@smallexample
4617@group
563e308f 4618SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4619@end group
4620@end smallexample
4621
4622@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4623@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4624@kindex OVERLAY
4625@cindex overlays
4626An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4627are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4628the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4629copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4630required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4631can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4632than another.
4633
4634Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4635@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4636output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4637command is as follows:
4638@smallexample
4639@group
4640OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4641 @{
4642 @var{secname1}
4643 @{
4644 @var{output-section-command}
4645 @var{output-section-command}
4646 @dots{}
4647 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4648 @var{secname2}
4649 @{
4650 @var{output-section-command}
4651 @var{output-section-command}
4652 @dots{}
4653 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4654 @dots{}
4655 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4656@end group
4657@end smallexample
4658
4659Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4660section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4661section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4662those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4663except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4664sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4665
4666The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4667addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4668memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4669whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4670and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4671and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4672
4673If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4674among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4675all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4676section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4677NOCROSSREFS}.
4678
4679For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4680provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4681defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4682@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4683the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4684within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4685symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4686
4687At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4688the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4689
4690Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4691@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4692@smallexample
4693@group
4694 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4695 @{
4696 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4697 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4698 @}
4699@end group
4700@end smallexample
4701@noindent
4702This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4703address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4704@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4705following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4706@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4707@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4708
4709C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4710like the following.
4711
4712@smallexample
4713@group
4714 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4715 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4716 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4717@end group
4718@end smallexample
4719
4720Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4721everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4722example could have been written identically as follows.
4723
4724@smallexample
4725@group
4726 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4727 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4728 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4729 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4730 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4731 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4732 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4733@end group
4734@end smallexample
4735
4736@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4737@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4738@kindex MEMORY
4739@cindex memory regions
4740@cindex regions of memory
4741@cindex allocating memory
4742@cindex discontinuous memory
4743The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4744memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4745
4746The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4747memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4748may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4749can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4750set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4751regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4752around to fit into the available regions.
4753
4754A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4755command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4756you wish. The syntax is:
4757@smallexample
4758@group
a1ab1d2a 4759MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4760 @{
4761 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4762 @dots{}
4763 @}
4764@end group
4765@end smallexample
4766
4767The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4768region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4769Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4770with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4771must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4772add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4773command.
252b5132
RH
4774
4775@cindex memory region attributes
4776The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4777whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4778not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4779@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4780section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4781the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4782them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4783
4784The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4785@table @samp
4786@item R
4787Read-only section
4788@item W
4789Read/write section
4790@item X
4791Executable section
4792@item A
4793Allocatable section
4794@item I
4795Initialized section
4796@item L
4797Same as @samp{I}
4798@item !
c09e9a8c 4799Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4800@end table
4801
4802If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4803@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4804attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4805in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4806attributes.
4807
4808@kindex ORIGIN =
4809@kindex o =
4810@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4811The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4812the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4813cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4814abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4815@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4816
4817@kindex LENGTH =
4818@kindex len =
4819@kindex l =
4820The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4821region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4822be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4823@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4824
4825In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4826available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4827and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4828linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4829is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4830or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4831explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4832region.
4833
4834@smallexample
4835@group
a1ab1d2a 4836MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4837 @{
4838 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4839 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4840 @}
4841@end group
4842@end smallexample
4843
4844Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4845specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4846@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4847a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4848output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4849was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4850the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4851output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4852region, the linker will issue an error message.
4853
3ec57632 4854It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4855expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4856@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4857
4858@smallexample
4859@group
c0065db7 4860 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4861@end group
4862@end smallexample
4863
252b5132
RH
4864@node PHDRS
4865@section PHDRS Command
4866@kindex PHDRS
4867@cindex program headers
4868@cindex ELF program headers
4869@cindex program segments
4870@cindex segments, ELF
4871The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4872@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4873loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4874program with the @samp{-p} option.
4875
4876When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4877reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4878program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4879This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4880interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4881
4882The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4883in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4884precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4885the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4886not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4887
4888The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4889generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4890ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4891
4892This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4893@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4894
4895@smallexample
4896@group
4897PHDRS
4898@{
4899 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4900 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4901@}
4902@end group
4903@end smallexample
4904
4905The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4906of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4907header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4908with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4909must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4910is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4911
4912Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4913system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4914specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4915sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4916attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4917Section Phdr}.
4918
4919It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4920merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4921repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4922contain the section.
4923
4924If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4925then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4926not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4927convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4928placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4929default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4930segment at all.
4931
4932@kindex FILEHDR
4933@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4934You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4935the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4936The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4937file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4938include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4939segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4940these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4941
4942The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4943value of the keyword.
4944
4945@table @asis
4946@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4947Indicates an unused program header.
4948
4949@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4950Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4951the file.
4952
4953@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4954Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4955
4956@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4957Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4958found.
4959
4960@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4961Indicates a segment holding note information.
4962
4963@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4964A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4965ABI.
4966
4967@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4968Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4969
4970@item @var{expression}
4971An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4972be used for types not defined above.
4973@end table
4974
4975You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4976in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4977@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4978Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4979output section attribute.
4980
4981The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4982which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4983explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4984an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4985header.
4986
4987Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4988headers used on a native ELF system.
4989
4990@example
4991@group
4992PHDRS
4993@{
4994 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4995 interp PT_INTERP ;
4996 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4997 data PT_LOAD ;
4998 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4999@}
5000
5001SECTIONS
5002@{
5003 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5004 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5005 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5006 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5007 @dots{}
5008 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5009 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5010 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5011 @dots{}
5012@}
5013@end group
5014@end example
5015
5016@node VERSION
5017@section VERSION Command
5018@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5019@cindex symbol versions
5020@cindex version script
5021@cindex versions of symbols
5022The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5023only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5024symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5025a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5026shared library.
5027
5028You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5029you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5030also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5031
5032The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5033@smallexample
5034VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5035@end smallexample
5036
5037The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5038Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5039version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5040version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5041version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5042scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5043library.
5044
5045The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5046examples.
5047
5048@smallexample
5049VERS_1.1 @{
5050 global:
5051 foo1;
5052 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5053 old*;
5054 original*;
5055 new*;
252b5132
RH
5056@};
5057
5058VERS_1.2 @{
5059 foo2;
5060@} VERS_1.1;
5061
5062VERS_2.0 @{
5063 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5064 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5065 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5066 "f(int, double)";
5067 @};
252b5132
RH
5068@} VERS_1.2;
5069@end smallexample
5070
5071This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5072version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5073The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5074a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5075of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5076symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5077is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5078in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5079However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5080name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5081
5082Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5083depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5084to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5085
5086Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5087depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5088and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5089
5090When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5091specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5092unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5093unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5094somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5095wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5096wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5097set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5098ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5099
5100The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5101they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5102could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5103However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5104
0f6bf451 5105Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5106in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5107symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5108won't.
5109
5110@smallexample
7c9c73be 5111@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5112@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5113
252b5132
RH
5114When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5115symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5116requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5117shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5118loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5119linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5120application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5121way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5122all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5123search for each symbol reference.
5124
5125The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5126doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5127that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5128functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5129the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5130required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5131that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5132versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5133the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5134
5135There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5136first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5137source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5138script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5139maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5140@smallexample
5141__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5142@end smallexample
5143@noindent
5144in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5145be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5146The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5147@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5148takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5149
5150The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5151function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5152an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5153version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5154linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5155
5156To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5157source file. Here is an example:
5158
5159@smallexample
5160__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5161__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5162__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5163__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5164@end smallexample
5165
5166In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5167unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5168example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5169@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5170
5171When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5172some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5173this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5174@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5175declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5176you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5177
5178If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5179within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5180(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5181specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5182
cb840a31
L
5183You can also specify the language in the version script:
5184
5185@smallexample
5186VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5187@end smallexample
5188
c0065db7 5189The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5190The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5191demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5192patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5193@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5194
86043bbb
MM
5195Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5196described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5197or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5198the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5199whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5200cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5201might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5202should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5203expect when you upgrade.
5204
252b5132
RH
5205@node Expressions
5206@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5207@cindex expressions
5208@cindex arithmetic
5209The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5210that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5211expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5212host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5213
5214You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5215
5216The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5217expressions.
5218
5219@menu
5220* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5221* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5222* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5223* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5224* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5225* Operators:: Operators
5226* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5227* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5228* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5229@end menu
5230
5231@node Constants
5232@subsection Constants
5233@cindex integer notation
5234@cindex constants in linker scripts
5235All constants are integers.
5236
5237As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5238octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5239hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5240@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5241@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5242value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5243
5244@cindex scaled integers
5245@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5246@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5247@cindex suffixes for integers
5248@cindex integer suffixes
5249In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5250constant by
5251@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5252@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5253@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5254@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5255@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5256@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5257@tex
5258${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5259@end tex
5260@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5261respectively. For example, the following
5262all refer to the same quantity:
5263
252b5132 5264@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5265_fourk_1 = 4K;
5266_fourk_2 = 4096;
5267_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5268_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5269@end smallexample
5270
8a308ae8
NC
5271Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5272conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5273
0c71d759
NC
5274@node Symbolic Constants
5275@subsection Symbolic Constants
5276@cindex symbolic constants
5277@kindex CONSTANT
5278It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5279the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5280
5281@table @code
5282@item MAXPAGESIZE
5283@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5284The target's maximum page size.
5285
5286@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5287@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5288The target's default page size.
5289@end table
5290
5291So for example:
5292
5293@smallexample
5294 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5295@end smallexample
5296
5297will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5298supported by the target.
5299
252b5132
RH
5300@node Symbols
5301@subsection Symbol Names
5302@cindex symbol names
5303@cindex names
5304@cindex quoted symbol names
5305@kindex "
5306Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5307and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5308Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5309specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5310keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5311@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5312"SECTION" = 9;
5313"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5314@end smallexample
5315
5316Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5317to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5318whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5319
ecca9871
L
5320@node Orphan Sections
5321@subsection Orphan Sections
5322@cindex orphan
5323Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5324are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5325script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5326output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5327placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5328attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5329same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5330If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5331at the end of the file.
5332
5333For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5334well as section flag.
5335
41911f68 5336If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5337the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5338__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5339section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5340orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5341representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5342character.
5343
252b5132
RH
5344@node Location Counter
5345@subsection The Location Counter
5346@kindex .
5347@cindex dot
5348@cindex location counter
5349@cindex current output location
5350The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5351current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5352location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5353within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5354anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5355
5356@cindex holes
5357Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5358moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5359location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5360and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5361doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5362
5363@smallexample
5364SECTIONS
5365@{
5366 output :
5367 @{
5368 file1(.text)
5369 . = . + 1000;
5370 file2(.text)
5371 . += 1000;
5372 file3(.text)
563e308f 5373 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5374@}
5375@end smallexample
5376@noindent
5377In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5378located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5379followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5380@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5381@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5382specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5383
5c6bbab8
NC
5384@cindex dot inside sections
5385Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5386current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5387statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5388absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5389however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5390not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5391
5392@smallexample
5393SECTIONS
5394@{
5395 . = 0x100
5396 .text: @{
5397 *(.text)
5398 . = 0x200
5399 @}
5400 . = 0x500
5401 .data: @{
5402 *(.data)
5403 . += 0x600
5404 @}
5405@}
5406@end smallexample
5407
5408The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5409and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5410the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5411much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5412move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5413and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5414the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5415the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5416
b5666f2f
AM
5417@cindex dot outside sections
5418Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5419output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5420needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5421
5422@smallexample
5423SECTIONS
5424@{
5425 start_of_text = . ;
5426 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5427 end_of_text = . ;
5428
5429 start_of_data = . ;
5430 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5431 end_of_data = . ;
5432@}
5433@end smallexample
5434
5435If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5436not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5437between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5438should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5439blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5440the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5441sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5442statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5443special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5444place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5445as follows:
5446
5447@smallexample
5448SECTIONS
5449@{
5450 start_of_text = . ;
5451 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5452 end_of_text = . ;
5453
5454 start_of_data = . ;
5455 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5456 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5457 end_of_data = . ;
5458@}
5459@end smallexample
5460
5461This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5462@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5463placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5464assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5465a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5466section. So you could write:
5467
5468@smallexample
5469SECTIONS
5470@{
5471 start_of_text = . ;
5472 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5473 end_of_text = . ;
5474
5475 . = . ;
5476 start_of_data = . ;
5477 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5478 end_of_data = . ;
5479@}
5480@end smallexample
5481
5482Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5483@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5484
252b5132
RH
5485@need 2000
5486@node Operators
5487@subsection Operators
5488@cindex operators for arithmetic
5489@cindex arithmetic operators
5490@cindex precedence in expressions
5491The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5492the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5493@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5494@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5495@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5496@smallexample
5497precedence associativity Operators Notes
5498(highest)
54991 left ! - ~ (1)
55002 left * / %
55013 left + -
55024 left >> <<
55035 left == != > < <= >=
55046 left &
55057 left |
55068 left &&
55079 left ||
550810 right ? :
550911 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5510(lowest)
5511@end smallexample
5512Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5513(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5514(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5515@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5516@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5517@tex
5518\vskip \baselineskip
5519%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5520\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5521\hrule
5522\halign
5523{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5524height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5525&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5526height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5527\noalign{\hrule}
5528height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5529&highest&&&&&\cr
5530% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5531&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5532&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5533&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5534&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5535&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5536&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5537&7&&left&&|&\cr
5538&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5539&9&&left&&||&\cr
5540&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5541&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5542&lowest&&&&&\cr
5543height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5544\hrule}
5545@end tex
5546@iftex
5547{
5548@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5549@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5550@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5551}
5552@end iftex
5553@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5554
5555@node Evaluation
5556@subsection Evaluation
5557@cindex lazy evaluation
5558@cindex expression evaluation order
5559The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5560an expression when absolutely necessary.
5561
5562The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5563address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5564regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5565as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5566
5567However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5568until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5569other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5570for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5571
5572The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5573assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5574allocation.
5575
5576Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5577@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5578
5579If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5580available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5581following
5582@smallexample
5583@group
5584SECTIONS
5585 @{
a1ab1d2a 5586 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5587 @{ *(.text) @}
5588 @}
5589@end group
5590@end smallexample
5591@noindent
5592will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5593address}.
5594
5595@node Expression Section
5596@subsection The Section of an Expression
5597@cindex expression sections
5598@cindex absolute expressions
5599@cindex relative expressions
5600@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5601@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5602@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5603Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5604relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5605using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5606value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5607symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5608operations.
5609
abf4be64
AM
5610Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5611section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5612address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5613@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5614functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5615One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5616(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5617differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5618versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5619section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5620Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5621absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5622given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5623everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5624
5625In the following simple example,
252b5132 5626
7542af2a
AM
5627@smallexample
5628@group
5629SECTIONS
5630 @{
5631 . = 0x100;
5632 __executable_start = 0x100;
5633 .data :
5634 @{
5635 . = 0x10;
5636 __data_start = 0x10;
5637 *(.data)
5638 @}
5639 @dots{}
5640 @}
5641@end group
5642@end smallexample
252b5132 5643
7542af2a
AM
5644both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5645address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5646@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5647section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5648
5c3049d2
AM
5649For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5650addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5651
5652@itemize @bullet
5653@item
c05f749e
AM
5654Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5655operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5656absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5657@item
7542af2a
AM
5658Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5659relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5660and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5661@item
c05f749e
AM
5662Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5663in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5664address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5665before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5666@end itemize
5667
5668The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5669
5670@itemize @bullet
5671@item
5672An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5673@item
5674The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5675@item
9bc8bb33
AM
5676The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5677relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresess
5678(after above conversions) is also a number.
5679@item
5680The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5681relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5682section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5683@item
5684The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5685conversions) is an absolute address.
5686@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5687
5688You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5689to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5690create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5691section @samp{.data}:
5692@smallexample
5693SECTIONS
5694 @{
5695 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5696 @}
5697@end smallexample
5698@noindent
5699If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5700@samp{.data} section.
5701
7542af2a
AM
5702Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5703particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5704
252b5132
RH
5705@node Builtin Functions
5706@subsection Builtin Functions
5707@cindex functions in expressions
5708The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5709use in linker script expressions.
5710
5711@table @code
5712@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5713@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5714@cindex expression, absolute
5715Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5716of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5717value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5718normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5719
5720@item ADDR(@var{section})
5721@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5722@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5723Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5724script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5725the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5726@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5727@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5728the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5729@smallexample
5730@group
5731SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5732 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5733 @{
252b5132
RH
5734 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5735 @dots{}
5736 @}
5737 .output :
5738 @{
5739 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5740 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5741 @}
5742@dots{} @}
5743@end group
5744@end smallexample
5745
876f4090
NS
5746@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5747@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5748@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5749@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5750@cindex round up location counter
5751@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5752@cindex round up expression
5753@cindex align expression
5754Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5755to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5756doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5757arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5758expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5759equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5760
5761Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5762next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5763variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5764input sections:
252b5132
RH
5765@smallexample
5766@group
5767SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5768 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5769 *(.data)
5770 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5771 @}
5772@dots{} @}
5773@end group
5774@end smallexample
5775@noindent
5776The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5777a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5778a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5779of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5780
5781The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5782
362c1d1a
NS
5783@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5784@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5785@cindex section alignment
5786Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5787been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5788evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5789the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5790value in that section.
5791@smallexample
5792@group
5793SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5794 .output @{
5795 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5796 @dots{}
5797 @}
5798@dots{} @}
5799@end group
5800@end smallexample
5801
252b5132
RH
5802@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5803@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5804This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5805scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5806section.
5807
2d20f7bf
JJ
5808@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5809@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5810This is equivalent to either
5811@smallexample
5812(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5813@end smallexample
5814or
5815@smallexample
5816(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5817@end smallexample
5818@noindent
5819depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5820for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5821@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5822If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5823memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5824bytes in the on-disk file.
5825
5826This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5827any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5828@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5829be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5830working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5831
5832@noindent
5833Example:
5834@smallexample
5835 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5836@end smallexample
5837
5838@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5839@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5840This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5841evaluation purposes.
5842
5843@smallexample
5844 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5845@end smallexample
5846
a4f5ad88
JJ
5847@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5848@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5849This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5850@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5851When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5852does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5853@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5854boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5855it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5856@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5857
5858@smallexample
5859 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5860@end smallexample
5861
252b5132
RH
5862@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5863@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5864@cindex symbol defaults
5865Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5866defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5867return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5868default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5869shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5870the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5871existed, its value is preserved:
5872
5873@smallexample
5874@group
5875SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5876 .text : @{
5877 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5878 @dots{}
5879 @}
5880 @dots{}
5881@}
5882@end group
5883@end smallexample
5884
3ec57632
NC
5885@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5886@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5887Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5888
252b5132
RH
5889@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5890@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5891@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5892Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5893Section LMA}).
5894
5895@kindex MAX
5896@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5897Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5898
5899@kindex MIN
5900@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5901Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5902
5903@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5904@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5905@cindex unallocated address, next
5906Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5907This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5908use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5909output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5910
3ec57632
NC
5911@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5912@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5913Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5914
ba916c8a
MM
5915@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5916@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5917Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5918value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5919option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5920@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5921be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5922``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5923name.
5924
252b5132
RH
5925@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5926@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5927@cindex section size
5928Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5929been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5930evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5931@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5932@smallexample
5933@group
5934SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5935 .output @{
5936 .start = . ;
5937 @dots{}
5938 .end = . ;
5939 @}
5940 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5941 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5942@dots{} @}
5943@end group
5944@end smallexample
5945
5946@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5947@itemx sizeof_headers
5948@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5949@cindex header size
5950Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5951information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5952this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5953choose, to facilitate paging.
5954
5955@cindex not enough room for program headers
5956@cindex program headers, not enough room
5957When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5958@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5959number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5960addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5961additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5962room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5963the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5964script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5965you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5966command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5967@end table
5968
5969@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5970@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5971@cindex implicit linker scripts
5972If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5973an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5974linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5975linker will report an error.
5976
5977An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5978
5979Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5980assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5981commands.
5982
5983Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5984at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5985read. This can affect archive searching.
5986
5987@ifset GENERIC
5988@node Machine Dependent
5989@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5990
5991@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5992@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5993sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5994functionality are not listed.
5995
5996@menu
36f63dca
NC
5997@ifset H8300
5998* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5999@end ifset
6000@ifset I960
6001* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6002@end ifset
6003@ifset ARM
6004* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6005@end ifset
6006@ifset HPPA
6007* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6008@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6009@ifset M68K
6010* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6011@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6012@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6013* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6014@end ifset
2469cfa2 6015@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6016* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6017@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
6018@ifset M68HC11
6019* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6020@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6021@ifset POWERPC
6022* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6023@end ifset
6024@ifset POWERPC64
6025* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6026@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6027@ifset SPU
6028* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6029@end ifset
74459f0e 6030@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6031* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6032@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6033@ifset WIN32
6034* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6035@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6036@ifset XTENSA
6037* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6038@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6039@end menu
6040@end ifset
6041
252b5132
RH
6042@ifset H8300
6043@ifclear GENERIC
6044@raisesections
6045@end ifclear
6046
6047@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6048@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6049
6050@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6051For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6052you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6053
6054@table @emph
6055@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6056@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6057@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6058targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6059program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6060respectively.
6061
6062@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6063@item synthesizing instructions
6064@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 6065@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6066sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6067page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6068(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6069@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6070top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
6071
6072@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6073@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6074biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6075which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6076page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6077(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6078@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6079the top page of memory).
6080
6081@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6082@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
608332 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6084changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6085(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6086@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6087the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6088@end table
6089
6090@ifclear GENERIC
6091@lowersections
6092@end ifclear
6093@end ifset
6094
36f63dca 6095@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6096@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6097@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6098@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6099@node Renesas
6100@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6101
c2dcd04e
NC
6102@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6103H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6104options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6105@end ifset
6106@end ifclear
6107
6108@ifset I960
6109@ifclear GENERIC
6110@raisesections
6111@end ifclear
6112
6113@node i960
6114@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6115
6116@cindex i960 support
6117
6118You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6119specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6120family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6121incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6122linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6123libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6124search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6125
6126For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6127well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6128paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6129the names
6130
6131@smallexample
6132@group
6133try
6134libtry.a
6135tryca
6136libtryca.a
6137@end group
6138@end smallexample
6139
6140@noindent
6141The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6142two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6143
6144You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6145the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6146use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6147specifies a library.
6148
6149@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6150@cindex relaxing on i960
6151@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6152you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6153@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6154them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6155instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6156instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6157target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6158not itself call any subroutines).
6159
48229727
JB
6160@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6161@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6162@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6163The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6164
6165The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6166
85fdf906
AH
6167@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6168@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6169The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6170
36f63dca
NC
6171@ifclear GENERIC
6172@lowersections
6173@end ifclear
6174@end ifset
6175
6176@ifset ARM
6177@ifclear GENERIC
6178@raisesections
6179@end ifclear
6180
93fd0973
SC
6181@ifset M68HC11
6182@ifclear GENERIC
6183@raisesections
6184@end ifclear
6185
6186@node M68HC11/68HC12
6187@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6188
6189@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6190
6191@subsection Linker Relaxation
6192
6193For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6194optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6195
6196@table @emph
6197@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6198@item relaxing address modes
6199@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6200targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6201program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6202respectively.
6203
6204@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6205transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6206page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6207
6208@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6209When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6210of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6211addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6212@code{bset} instructions.
6213
6214@end table
6215
6216@subsection Trampoline Generation
6217
6218@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6219@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6220For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6221call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6222will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6223trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6224case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6225point to the function trampoline.
6226
6227@ifclear GENERIC
6228@lowersections
6229@end ifclear
6230@end ifset
6231
36f63dca 6232@node ARM
3674e28a 6233@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6234
6235@cindex ARM interworking support
6236@kindex --support-old-code
6237For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6238between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6239been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6240line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6241libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6242option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6243given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6244which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6245the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6246non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6247
6248@cindex thumb entry point
6249@cindex entry point, thumb
6250@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6251The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6252@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6253But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6254branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6255executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6256
ce11ba6c
KT
6257@cindex PE import table prefixing
6258@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6259The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6260the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6261elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6262import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6263
e489d0ae
PB
6264@cindex BE8
6265@kindex --be8
6266The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6267executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6268The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6269
3674e28a
PB
6270@cindex TARGET1
6271@kindex --target1-rel
6272@kindex --target1-abs
6273The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6274@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6275or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6276and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6277
6278@cindex TARGET2
6279@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6280The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6281@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6282meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6283@table @samp
6284@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6285@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6286@item abs
6287@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6288@item got-rel
6289@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6290@end table
6291
319850b4
JB
6292@cindex FIX_V4BX
6293@kindex --fix-v4bx
6294The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6295specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6296interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6297also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6298
6299In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6300linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6301@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6302
6303In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6304relocations are ignored.
6305
845b51d6
PB
6306@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6307@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6308Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6309relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6310
6311@smallexample
6312TST rM, #1
6313MOVEQ PC, rM
6314BX Rn
6315@end smallexample
6316
6317This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6318and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6319condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6320
33bfe774
JB
6321@cindex USE_BLX
6322@kindex --use-blx
6323The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6324BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6325situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6326code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6327each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6328
6329This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6330specify it if you are using that target.
6331
c6dd86c6
JB
6332@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6333@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6334The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6335bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6336instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6337to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6338the support code can read the intended values.
6339
6340The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6341intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6342and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6343intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6344full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6345you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6346
6347If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6348enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6349@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6350mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6351vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6352@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6353
6354If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6355potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6356such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6357first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6358instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6359the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6360are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6361
2de70689
MGD
6362@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6363@kindex --fix-arm1176
6364@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6365The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6366in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6367are targetting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6368unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6369
6370Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6371Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentaion website at:
6372http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6373
bf21ed78
MS
6374@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6375@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6376The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6377warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6378enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6379linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6380using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6381not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6382
6383@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6384@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6385The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6386warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6387@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6388linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6389using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6390
726150b7
NC
6391@cindex PIC_VENEER
6392@kindex --pic-veneer
6393The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6394ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6395is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6396@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6397
6398@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6399@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6400The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6401code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6402perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6403placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6404controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6405The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6406duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6407group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6408code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6409where they should be placed.
6410
6411The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6412@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6413placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6414branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6415placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6416value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6417exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6418A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6419linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6420from the input sections.
6421
6422The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6423@samp{N = +1}.
6424
1a51c1a4
NC
6425Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6426only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6427otherwise.
6428
36f63dca
NC
6429@ifclear GENERIC
6430@lowersections
6431@end ifclear
6432@end ifset
6433
6434@ifset HPPA
6435@ifclear GENERIC
6436@raisesections
6437@end ifclear
6438
6439@node HPPA ELF32
6440@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6441@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6442@kindex --multi-subspace
6443When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6444import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6445The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6446stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6447multiple sub-spaces.
6448
6449@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6450@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6451Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6452stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6453@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6454sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6455a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6456the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6457conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6458prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6459A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6460branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6461@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6462@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6463detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6464positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6465
6466Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6467single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6468create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6469large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6470
6471@ifclear GENERIC
6472@lowersections
6473@end ifclear
6474@end ifset
6475
7fb9f789
NC
6476@ifset M68K
6477@ifclear GENERIC
6478@raisesections
6479@end ifclear
6480
6481@node M68K
6482@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6483
6484@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6485@kindex --got=@var{type}
6486The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6487The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6488@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6489the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6490@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6491entries only at non-negative offsets.
6492@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6493entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6494support such GOTs.
6495@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6496output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6497file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6498files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6499
6500@ifclear GENERIC
6501@lowersections
6502@end ifclear
6503@end ifset
6504
36f63dca
NC
6505@ifset MMIX
6506@ifclear GENERIC
6507@raisesections
6508@end ifclear
6509
6510@node MMIX
6511@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6512For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6513@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6514understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6515can translate between the two formats.
6516
6517There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6518Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6519registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6520equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6521@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6522global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6523this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6524symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6525
7a2de473
HPN
6526Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6527@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6528The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6529of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6530
6531Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6532are left out from an mmo file.
6533
6534@ifclear GENERIC
6535@lowersections
6536@end ifclear
6537@end ifset
6538
6539@ifset MSP430
6540@ifclear GENERIC
6541@raisesections
6542@end ifclear
6543
6544@node MSP430
6545@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6546For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6547will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6548just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6549
6550@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6551The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6552
6553@table @code
6554@item @samp{.vectors}
6555Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6556
6557@item @samp{.bootloader}
6558Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6559in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6560
6561@item @samp{.infomem}
6562Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6563this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6564
c0065db7 6565@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6566This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6567in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6568
6569@item @samp{.noinit}
6570Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6571
c0065db7 6572The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6573@end table
6574
6575@ifclear GENERIC
6576@lowersections
6577@end ifclear
6578@end ifset
6579
2a60a7a8
AM
6580@ifset POWERPC
6581@ifclear GENERIC
6582@raisesections
6583@end ifclear
6584
6585@node PowerPC ELF32
6586@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6587@cindex PowerPC long branches
6588@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6589Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6590displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6591@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6592@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6593the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6594section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6595section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6596@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6597both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6598considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6599
6600@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6601@table @option
6602@cindex PowerPC PLT
6603@kindex --bss-plt
6604@item --bss-plt
6605Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6606generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6607the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6608writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6609@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6610PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6611compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6612BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6613
016687f8
AM
6614@kindex --secure-plt
6615@item --secure-plt
6616@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6617@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6618when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6619layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6620style BSS PLT.
6621
2a60a7a8
AM
6622@cindex PowerPC GOT
6623@kindex --sdata-got
6624@item --sdata-got
6625The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6626sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6627@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6628section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6629@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6630@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6631@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6632@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6633PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6634pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6635GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6636really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6637
6638@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6639@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6640@item --emit-stub-syms
6641This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6642symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6643
6644@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6645@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6646@item --no-tls-optimize
6647PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6648sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6649disable the optimization.
6650@end table
6651
6652@ifclear GENERIC
6653@lowersections
6654@end ifclear
6655@end ifset
6656
6657@ifset POWERPC64
6658@ifclear GENERIC
6659@raisesections
6660@end ifclear
6661
6662@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6663@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6664
6665@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6666@table @option
6667@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6668@kindex --stub-group-size
6669@item --stub-group-size
6670Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6671by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6672@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6673sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6674a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6675the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6676conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6677prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6678A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6679branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6680@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6681@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6682detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6683positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6684
6685Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6686single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6687create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6688large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6689
6690@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6691@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6692@item --emit-stub-syms
6693This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6694symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6695
6696@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6697@kindex --dotsyms
6698@kindex --no-dotsyms
6699@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6700These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6701in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6702function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6703code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6704properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6705to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6706@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6707dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6708feature.
6709
6710@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6711@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6712@item --no-tls-optimize
6713PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6714sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6715disable the optimization.
6716
6717@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6718@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6719@item --no-opd-optimize
6720PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6721corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6722the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6723Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6724
6725@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6726@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6727@item --non-overlapping-opd
6728Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6729@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6730the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6731entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6732
6733@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6734@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6735@item --no-toc-optimize
6736PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6737entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6738reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6739marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6740marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6741relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6742unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6743reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6744discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6745reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6746code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6747optimization.
6748
6749@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6750@kindex --no-multi-toc
6751@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
6752If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6753@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6754where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
6755entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6756total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6757grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6758TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6759calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6760help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
676164K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6762Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
6763
6764@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6765@kindex --no-toc-sort
6766@item --no-toc-sort
6767By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6768happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6769placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6770with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6771referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6772@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6773results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6774off this feature.
6775
6776@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6777@kindex --plt-align
6778@kindex --no-plt-align
6779@item --plt-align
6780@itemx --no-plt-align
6781Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
6782aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
6783boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
6784are packed tightly.
6785
6786@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
6787@kindex --plt-static-chain
6788@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
6789@item --plt-static-chain
6790@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
6791Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
6792chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
6793chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
6794
6795@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
6796@kindex --plt-thread-safe
6797@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
6798@item --plt-thread-safe
6799@itemx --no-thread-safe
6800With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
6801lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
6802another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
6803order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
6804memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
6805barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
6806looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
6807seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
6808default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
6809@end table
6810
6811@ifclear GENERIC
6812@lowersections
6813@end ifclear
6814@end ifset
6815
49fa1e15
AM
6816@ifset SPU
6817@ifclear GENERIC
6818@raisesections
6819@end ifclear
6820
6821@node SPU ELF
6822@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6823
6824@cindex SPU ELF options
6825@table @option
6826
6827@cindex SPU plugins
6828@kindex --plugin
6829@item --plugin
6830This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6831
6832@cindex SPU overlays
6833@kindex --no-overlays
6834@item --no-overlays
6835Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6836regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6837@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6838turns off all this special overlay handling.
6839
6840@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6841@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6842@item --emit-stub-syms
6843This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6844symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6845
6846@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6847@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6848@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6849This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6850function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6851on calls to non-overlay regions.
6852
6853@cindex SPU local store size
6854@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6855@item --local-store=lo:hi
6856@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6857the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6858range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6859
c0065db7 6860@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6861@kindex --stack-analysis
6862@item --stack-analysis
6863SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6864unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6865under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6866@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6867@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6868determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6869for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6870for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6871for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6872find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6873and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6874under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6875dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6876is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6877and calls will be given.
6878
c0065db7 6879@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6880@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6881@item --emit-stack-syms
6882This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6883in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6884These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6885functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6886functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6887such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6888The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6889@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6890@end table
6891
6892@ifclear GENERIC
6893@lowersections
6894@end ifclear
6895@end ifset
6896
36f63dca
NC
6897@ifset TICOFF
6898@ifclear GENERIC
6899@raisesections
6900@end ifclear
6901
6902@node TI COFF
6903@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6904@cindex TI COFF versions
6905@kindex --format=@var{version}
6906The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6907TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6908also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6909format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6910header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6911
6912@ifclear GENERIC
6913@lowersections
6914@end ifclear
6915@end ifset
6916
2ca22b03
NC
6917@ifset WIN32
6918@ifclear GENERIC
6919@raisesections
6920@end ifclear
6921
6922@node WIN32
6923@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6924
c0065db7 6925This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6926See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6927command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6928
6929@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6930@cindex import libraries
6931@item import libraries
69da35b5 6932The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6933libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6934regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6935archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6936support for creating such libraries provided with the
6937@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6938
c0065db7
RM
6939@item exporting DLL symbols
6940@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6941The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6942
6943@table @emph
6944@item using auto-export functionality
6945@cindex using auto-export functionality
6946By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6947which is controlled by the following command line options:
6948
0a5d968e
NC
6949@itemize
6950@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6951@item --exclude-symbols
6952@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6953@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6954@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6955@end itemize
6956
09e2aba4
DK
6957When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6958(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6959symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6960often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6961private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6962options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6963exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6964final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6965
6966If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6967command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6968if either of the following are true:
6969
6970@itemize
6971@item A DEF file is used.
6972@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6973@end itemize
dc8465bf 6974
c0065db7
RM
6975@item using a DEF file
6976@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6977Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6978an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6979exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6980name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6981command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6982
6983@example
6984gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6985@end example
6986
0a5d968e
NC
6987Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6988@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6989
dc8465bf
NC
6990Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6991
6992@example
4b5bd4e7 6993LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6994
6995EXPORTS
6996foo
6997bar
6998_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6999another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7000var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7001doo = foo == foo2
7002eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7003@end example
dc8465bf 7004
7fcab871 7005This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7006symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7007alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7008by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7009@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7010@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7011export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7012in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7013symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7014
6b31ad16
DS
7015The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7016name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7017the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7018
b45619c0
NC
7019When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7020library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7021@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7022executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7023
7024With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7025specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7026non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7027
7028If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7029or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7030filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7031
4b5bd4e7
DS
7032The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7033
7034@example
7035EXPORTS
7036 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7037 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7038 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7039@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7040
7041Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7042@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7043@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7044@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7045Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7046@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7047string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7048
7049The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7050
7051@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7052will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7053by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7054linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7055library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7056
7057@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7058The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7059the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7060@code{*_imp__foo}).
7061
7062@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7063well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7064read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7065variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7066the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7067extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7068application will behave unexpectedly.
7069
7070@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7071it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7072symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7073API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7074the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7075
4b5bd4e7
DS
7076See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7077other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7078
7079@cindex creating a DEF file
7080While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7081with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7082
7083@item Using decorations
7084@cindex Using decorations
7085Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7086itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7087declared as:
7088
7089@example
7090__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7091__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7092@end example
7093
7094All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7095any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7096this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7097the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7098
7099Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7100decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7101instead:
7102
7103@example
7104__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7105__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7106@end example
7107
c0065db7
RM
7108This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7109when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7110variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7111code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7112of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7113omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7114@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7115information.
c0065db7 7116@end table
dc8465bf 7117
2ca22b03
NC
7118@cindex automatic data imports
7119@item automatic data imports
7120The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7121by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7122compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7123issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7124code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7125c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7126initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7127decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7128platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7129command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7130The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7131suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7132trigger the feature's use.
7133
c0065db7 7134auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7135additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7136
c0065db7 7137"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7138documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7139
c0065db7
RM
7140The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7141occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7142One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7143below.
7144
7145@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7146For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7147object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7148offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7149field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7150in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7151without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7152The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7153references.
7154
c0065db7
RM
7155The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7156be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7157themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7158runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7159compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7160support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7161run without error on an older system.
7162
c0065db7
RM
7163@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7164enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7165
7166@cindex direct linking to a dll
7167@item direct linking to a dll
7168The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7169including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7170libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7171traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7172libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7173function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7174though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7175storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7176tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7177large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7178
c0065db7 7179Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7180@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7181of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7182perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7183select the dll instead of an import library.
7184
2ca22b03 7185
69da35b5
NC
7186For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7187to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7188
7189@example
45e948fe
NC
7190libxxx.dll.a
7191xxx.dll.a
7192libxxx.a
7193xxx.lib
69da35b5 7194cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7195libxxx.dll
7196xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7197@end example
7198
69da35b5
NC
7199before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7200
c0065db7
RM
7201(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7202where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7203@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7204file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7205@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7206
c0065db7
RM
7207Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7208@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7209was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7210various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7211could coexist on the same machine.
7212
2ca22b03
NC
7213The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7214applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7215libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7216
7217@example
7218bin/
7219 cygxxx.dll
7220lib/
7221 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7222 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7223@end example
7224
c0065db7
RM
7225Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7226done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7227
72281. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7229@example
7230gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7231@end example
2ca22b03 7232
69da35b5
NC
7233However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7234(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7235@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7236not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7237
2ca22b03
NC
72382. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7239directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7240should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7241making the app/dll.
7242
7243@example
7244ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7245@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7246
7247Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7248
7249@example
7250gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7251@end example
69da35b5
NC
7252
7253This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7254perfectly legal
7255
7256@example
7257bin/
7258 cygxxx-5.dll
7259lib/
c0065db7 7260 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7261@end example
7262
dc8465bf 7263Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7264even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7265@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7266
7267Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7268wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7269
72701. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7271work with auto-imported data.
7272
dc8465bf
NC
72732. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7274import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7275symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7276for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7277possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7278
45e948fe
NC
72793. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7280critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7281in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7282stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7283
69da35b5 7284So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7285true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7286a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7287binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7288massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7289requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7290will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7291
c0065db7 7292@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7293@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7294@item adding additional names
7295Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7296A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7297exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7298when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7299import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7300
c0065db7 7301@example
dc8465bf
NC
7302LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7303
7304EXPORTS
c0065db7 7305foo
dc8465bf 7306_foo = foo
c0065db7 7307@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7308
7309The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7310
7311Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7312source code using the "weak" attribute:
7313
c0065db7
RM
7314@example
7315void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7316void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7317@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7318
7319See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7320symbols.
7321
7322@item renaming symbols
7323Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7324kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7325@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7326DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7327created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7328
c0065db7 7329@example
dc8465bf
NC
7330LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7331
7332EXPORTS
7333_foo = foo
c0065db7 7334@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7335
7336The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7337@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7338@end table
dc8465bf 7339
0a5d968e 7340Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7341unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7342If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7343@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7344that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7345@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7346renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7347to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7348the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7349In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7350which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7351
7352@cindex weak externals
7353@item weak externals
7354The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7355weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7356defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7357are three variants of weak externals:
7358@itemize
7359@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7360called lazy externals.
7361@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7362This form is not presently implemented.
7363@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7364implemented.
7365@end itemize
7366As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7367are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7368uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7369
7370@cindex aligned common symbols
7371@item aligned common symbols
7372As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7373desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7374the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7375carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7376by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7377tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7378but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7379warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7380@end table
7381
7382@ifclear GENERIC
7383@lowersections
7384@end ifclear
7385@end ifset
7386
e0001a05
NC
7387@ifset XTENSA
7388@ifclear GENERIC
7389@raisesections
7390@end ifclear
7391
7392@node Xtensa
7393@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7394
7395@cindex Xtensa processors
7396The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7397@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7398specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7399keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7400example, with the command:
7401
7402@smallexample
7403SECTIONS
7404@{
7405 .text : @{
7406 *(.literal .text)
7407 @}
7408@}
7409@end smallexample
7410
7411@noindent
7412@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7413and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7414literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7415interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7416group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7417files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7418and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7419
43cd72b9 7420@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7421@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7422Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7423provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7424is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7425literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7426will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7427location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7428the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7429unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7430@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7431range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7432
7433For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7434to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7435instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7436instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7437instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7438@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7439hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7440By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7441switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7442density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7443instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7444performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7445linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7446a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7447
7448The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7449control the linker:
7450
7451@cindex Xtensa options
7452@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7453@item --size-opt
7454When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7455more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7456no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7457alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7458preserve the correctness of the code.
7459@end table
e0001a05
NC
7460
7461@ifclear GENERIC
7462@lowersections
7463@end ifclear
7464@end ifset
7465
252b5132
RH
7466@ifclear SingleFormat
7467@node BFD
7468@chapter BFD
7469
7470@cindex back end
7471@cindex object file management
7472@cindex object formats available
7473@kindex objdump -i
7474The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7475These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7476object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7477format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7478it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7479associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7480object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7481(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7482list all the formats available for your configuration.
7483
7484@cindex BFD requirements
7485@cindex requirements for BFD
7486As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7487several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7488BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7489formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7490been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7491BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7492may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7493
7494One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7495mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7496useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7497conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7498
7499@menu
7500* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7501@end menu
7502
7503@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7504@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7505@cindex opening object files
7506@include bfdsumm.texi
7507@end ifclear
7508
7509@node Reporting Bugs
7510@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7511@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7512@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7513
ff5dcc92 7514Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7515
7516Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7517it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7518to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7519work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7520@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7521
7522In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7523information that enables us to fix the bug.
7524
7525@menu
7526* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7527* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7528@end menu
7529
7530@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7531@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7532@cindex bug criteria
7533
7534If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7535
7536@itemize @bullet
7537@cindex fatal signal
7538@cindex linker crash
7539@cindex crash of linker
7540@item
7541If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7542@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7543
7544@cindex error on valid input
7545@item
ff5dcc92 7546If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7547
7548@cindex invalid input
7549@item
ff5dcc92 7550If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7551may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7552object files are correct.
7553
7554@item
7555If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7556improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7557@end itemize
7558
7559@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7560@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7561@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7562@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7563
7564A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7565products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7566recommend you contact that organization first.
7567
7568You can find contact information for many support companies and
7569individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7570distribution.
7571
ad22bfe8 7572@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7573Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7574@value{BUGURL}.
7575@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7576
7577The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7578@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7579fact or leave it out, state it!
7580
7581Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7582problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7583assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7584matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7585the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7586location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7587were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7588into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7589specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7590and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7591
7592Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7593the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7594on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7595
7596Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7597bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7598respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7599You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7600
7601To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7602
7603@itemize @bullet
7604@item
ff5dcc92 7605The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7606the @samp{--version} argument.
7607
7608Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7609the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7610
7611@item
ff5dcc92 7612Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7613patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7614
7615@item
7616The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7617version number.
7618
7619@item
ff5dcc92 7620What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7621``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7622
7623@item
7624The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7625observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7626list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7627sufficient.
7628
7629If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7630and then we might not encounter the bug.
7631
7632@item
7633A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7634bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7635provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7636bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7637state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7638requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7639we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7640attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7641
7642If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7643@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7644object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7645@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7646how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7647
7648@item
7649A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7650incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7651
ff5dcc92 7652Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7653will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7654not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7655a chance to make a mistake.
7656
7657Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7658say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7659copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7660C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7661and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7662fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7663you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7664any conclusion from our observations.
7665
7666@item
ff5dcc92 7667If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7668diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7669@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7670If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7671context, not by line number.
7672
7673The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7674sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7675@end itemize
7676
7677Here are some things that are not necessary:
7678
7679@itemize @bullet
7680@item
7681A description of the envelope of the bug.
7682
7683Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7684which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7685changes will not affect it.
7686
7687This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7688will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7689with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7690We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7691
7692Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7693of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7694output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7695less time, and so on.
7696
7697However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7698report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7699
7700@item
7701A patch for the bug.
7702
7703A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7704the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7705a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7706to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7707
ff5dcc92 7708Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7709construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7710through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7711able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7712fixed.
7713
7714And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7715patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7716help us to understand.
7717
7718@item
7719A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7720
7721Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7722things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7723@end itemize
7724
7725@node MRI
7726@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7727@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7728To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7729linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7730alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7731described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7732simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7733@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7734linker commands; these commands are described here.
7735
7736In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7737file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7738features to make use of them.
7739
7740You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7741@samp{-c} command-line option.
7742
7743Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7744command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7745blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7746MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7747issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7748
7749Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7750
7751You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7752lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7753The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7754
7755@table @code
7756@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7757@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7758@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7759Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7760the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7761@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7762your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7763script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7764commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7765input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7766@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7767
7768@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7769@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7770Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7771in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7772
7773@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7774
7775@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7776@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7777Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7778@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7779
7780@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7781@item BASE @var{expression}
7782Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7783absolute addresses) in the output file.
7784
7785@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7786@item CHIP @var{expression}
7787@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7788This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7789
7790@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7791@item END
7792This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7793
7794@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7795@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7796Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7797language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7798
7799@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7800@item
252b5132
RH
7801S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7802
7803@item
7804IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7805
7806@item
7807COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7808@samp{COFF}
7809@end enumerate
7810
7811@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7812@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7813Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7814@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7815
7816The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7817same line, with no change in its effect.
7818
7819@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7820@item LOAD @var{filename}
7821@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7822Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7823same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7824command line.
7825
7826@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7827@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7828@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7829MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7830option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7831
7832@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7833@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7834@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7835Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7836order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7837script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7838sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7839file, in the order specified.
7840
7841@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7842@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7843@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7844@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7845Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7846@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7847
7848@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7849@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7850@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7851@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7852You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7853specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7854If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7855@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7856@end table
7857
793c5807
NC
7858@node GNU Free Documentation License
7859@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7860@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7861
370b66a1
CD
7862@node LD Index
7863@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7864
7865@printindex cp
7866
7867@tex
7868% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7869% meantime:
7870\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7871\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7872\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7873\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7874\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7875\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7876\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7877\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7878\page\colophon
7879% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7880@end tex
7881
252b5132 7882@bye
This page took 1.103723 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.